Tafsir LabMethodGitHubTürkçe

23. Sūrat al-Muʾminūn

The Qurʾān · Sūra 23: al-Muʾminūn · 118 verses · 69 sections

This commentary was written by Claude (Anthropic); it carries no religious authority and should be checked against the classical sources.

Jump to a verse

118 verses. It is widely reported that it was revealed during the Meccan period. It takes its name from the word ٱلْمُؤْمِنُون in its first verse.

The sūra opens with a verdict: qad aflaḥa'l-muʾminūn — "the believers have attained deliverance". And immediately after the opening comes a list of attributes that fixes to whom that verdict is given (2-9). The sūra closes in the hundred and seventeenth verse with the same root: innahū lā yufliḥu'l-kāfirūn — "the disbelievers do not attain deliverance". The sūra, that is, opens with the positive of a single root (ف-ل-ح) and ends with its negative.

Everything in between is set down between these two sentences: the forming of the human being, rain and plants, a sequence of messengers beginning with Noah (Nūḥ), Moses (Mūsā) and Aaron (Hārūn), the son of Mary (Maryam) and his mother, the community that broke apart, people misled by prosperity, hearing and sight and heart, the demand made at the moment of death, the blast on the trumpet and the scales.

The determining structural element of the sūra is its two lists of attributes. The first is at 1-11, the second at 57-61. Both are built on the same grammatical pattern (wa'lladhīna hum…), and both close with a concluding sentence. The first list enumerates acts that are seen from outside, the second states that are within. Below, the two are treated separately and then compared.

And the first list should be read together with the ʿibādu'l-raḥmān list at the end of Sūrat al-Furqān (25/63-77). That list was treated in detail in al-Furqān. The two lists will be compared in a table in this file: the shared items, those found in only one of them, and the position each list holds within its sūra.


The structure of the sūra

The sūra consists of eight blocks. The block boundaries are for the most part drawn by the text's own repetitions.

BlockVersesSubjectWhat closes the block
I1-11The first list of attributes — six items opening with the prayer and closing with the prayer, and the inheritancehum fīhā khālidūn (11)
II12-22The forming of the human being, the seven paths, water sent down by measure, plants, animalswa ʿalayhā wa ʿalā'l-fulki tuḥmalūn (22)
III23-44Noah and the sequence of peoples that follows himfa-buʿdan li-qawmin lā yuʾminūn (44)
IV45-50Moses and Aaron; the son of Mary and his motherrabwatin dhāti qarārin wa maʿīn (50)
V51-56The address to the messengers, the one community, the breaking apart, the delusion of prosperitybal lā yashʿurūn (56)
VI57-77The second list of attributes, the limit of the burden, the book that speaks, the end of those in prosperityidhā hum fīhi mublisūn (77)
VII78-92Hearing, sight and heart; three questions and three answers; the proof of tawḥīdfa-taʿālā ʿammā yushrikūn (92)
VIII93-118Prayer, the moment of death and the barzakh, the trumpet, the scales, the reckoning, the closingwa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīn (118)

Repetitions within the sūra — countable data

What follows are facts that can be verified from the text. The claim that they establish a design is interpretation, and I offer it as an observation.

RepetitionFirst occurrenceLater occurrence(s)The difference
ف-ل-ح1qad aflaḥa'l-muʾminūn102humu'l-mufliḥūn · 117lā yufliḥu'l-kāfirūnThe verdict, the weighing, its negative
ن-ش-أ14anshaʾnāhu khalqan ākhar19, 31, 42, 78Five occurrences — the backbone root of the sūra
mā hādhā illā basharun mithlukum24 — Noah's people33 — the next people · 47basharayni mithlināThree times, three separate peoples
a-fa-lā tattaqūn23 — Noah32 — the next messengerTwo calls ending with the same sentence
rabbi'nṣurnī bimā kadhdhabūn26 — Noah39 — the next messengerWord for word the same prayer
bihī jinna25 — of Noah70 — of the Prophet addressedThe same charge, two ages
ābāʾinā'l-awwalīn24mā samiʿnā bi-hādhā fī ābāʾinā'l-awwalīn68am jāʾahum mā lam yaʾti ābāʾahumu'l-awwalīnA ground / a question
ḥattā ḥīn25fa-tarabbaṣū bihī (the other side says it)54fa-dharhum fī ghamratihim (the text says it)The same expression, in two mouths
غ-م-ر54fī ghamratihim63qulūbuhum fī ghamratinThe place they are left in / the place of the hearts
ت-ر-ف33atrafnāhum fi'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyā64akhadhnā mutrafīhim bi'l-ʿadhābBeing given / being seized
ḥattā idhā64 — the seizing of those in prosperity77 — the opening of the gate · 99 — the coming of deathThree turning points
س-ر-ع56nusāriʿu lahum fi'l-khayrāt (what they suppose)61yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrāt (what is)The same verb, one a delusion, the other an attribute
ح-س-ب55a-yaḥsabūna115a-fa-ḥasibtum · 117ḥisābuhū ʿinda rabbihTwo questions about supposing, one reckoning
āyātī tutlā ʿalaykum66 — in this world105 — in the hereafterThe same sentence, two places
ه-ج-ر67sāmiran tahjurūn(al-Furqān 25/30qurʾāna mahjūrā)Single within the sūra, a pair across sūras
ع-ل-و46qawman ʿālīn91la-ʿalā baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍ · 116fa-taʿāla'llāhRising, three times
rabbu'l-ʿarsh86al-ʿaẓīm116al-karīmTwo attributes, in two separate places
rabbanā … wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīn109 — the prayer that is mocked118the prayer that is commandedThe last sentence of the sūra
khayru…14aḥsanu'l-khāliqīn29khayru'l-munzilīn · 72khayru'l-rāziqīn · 109, 118khayru'l-rāḥimīnFive superlative constructions

The last row must be recorded separately: in the hundred and ninth verse this prayer is in the mouth of a group that is mocked for it; in the hundred and eighteenth verse the same sentence is the content of the command given to the one addressed. The sūra, that is, makes the speech that was mocked its own last sentence. This is a weave that can be verified from the text.


23/1

قَدْ أَفْلَحَ ٱلْمُؤْمِنُونَ

qad aflaḥa'l-muʾminūn

"The believers have attained deliverance."

أَفْلَحَ — root: ف-ل-ح

The root was worked out in al-Baqara and extended in the discussions of al-Shams 91/9 (qad aflaḥa man zakkāhā) and al-Aʿlā 87/14 (qad aflaḥa man tazakkā). I do not repeat it here. The picture established in al-Baqara is summed up as follows, and it has been used unchanged in the al-Mujādala, al-Ḥashr, al-Fatḥ and al-Taghābun sections:

The root is to split, to crack open. Fallāḥ — the farmer; he takes the name because he splits the soil. Falāḥ — to break through an obstacle and come out, to crack the husk, to come into a state of bearing fruit.

In al-Falaq, where the derivatives of the root were listed, this very verse was given as the example. I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is this, and it is worth recording: the same pattern (qad aflaḥa) opens a sentence in three places in the Qurʾān, and in all three the agent is described differently:

PlaceSentenceHow the agent is described
al-Shams 91/9qad aflaḥa man zakkāhāBy a verb — the one who purifies his soul
al-Aʿlā 87/14qad aflaḥa man tazakkāBy a verb — the one who is purified / who takes heed
al-Muʾminūn 23/1qad aflaḥa al-muʾminūnBy a name — and after it a description nine verses long

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the length of the third row: in the other two places the description of the agent is inside the sentence; here a name is set down and the description is spread across separate verses. The sūra, that is, sets about filling the word "believer" rather than leaving it empty.

قَدْ + a perfect verb

The word order must be recorded: when qad comes at the head of a perfect verb it reports confirmation (taḥqīq). And the verb is in the past — whereas the attributes described (2-9) are given in imperfect and active participle patterns, that is, as ongoing states.

I record this as an observation about the word order: the verdict is framed in the past tense, the condition in the ongoing tense. The lexicographers explain this kind of usage as "telling a thing as though it had happened, because its happening is certain"; I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted.

ٱلْمُؤْمِنُون

The root أ-م-نsafety, security. Muʾmin is the active participle of Form IV: the one who brings to safety / the one who trusts. The root has occurred in many places across this series and was treated in Quraysh (wa āmanahum min khawf) and at al-Ḥashr 59/23 (al-Muʾmin).

And an entry must be placed here: throughout the sūra the verdict will be attached not to a group but to an attribute. Accordingly the negative counterpart in the hundred and seventeenth verse is likewise built not with a name but with the act of not believing. This is what the principle recorded in Method — that no blanket ruling is issued about a group — comes to in this sūra: the verse attaches deliverance not to a faction but to a whole set of states enumerated across nine verses.


23/2

ٱلَّذِينَ هُمْ فِى صَلَاتِهِمْ خَٰشِعُونَ

alladhīna hum fī ṣalātihim khāshiʿūn

"They are those who are humble in their prayer."

The grammatical pattern of the list — the word order shared by the six items

The list consists of six items (2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9), and all six are built on the same word order. This is a fact that can be counted from the text:

VerseConnectivePronounThe fronted elementPredicate
2alladhīnahumfī ṣalātihimkhāshiʿūn
3wa'lladhīnahumʿani'l-laghwimuʿriḍūn
4wa'lladhīnahumli'l-zakātifāʿilūn
5wa'lladhīnahumli-furūjihimḥāfiẓūn
8wa'lladhīnahumli-amānātihim wa ʿahdihimrāʿūn
9wa'lladhīnahumʿalā ṣalawātihimyuḥāfiẓūn

In all six of the six items the complement — the prepositional phrase — has been brought before its predicate. In Arabic fronting (taqdīm) reports specification and emphasis; the lexicographers record this consistently.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is this sixfold regularity: the sentences do not say "they are humble", "they turn away"; they say "in their prayer — they are humble", "from idle speech — they turn away". In each item, that is, the field is fixed first and the disposition within that field second. The list thereby becomes readable as a list not of dispositions but of fields.

And there is a second regularity: five of the six items are nouns (active participles), and only the last is a verbyuḥāfiẓūn. This difference will be treated separately at the ninth verse.

خَاشِعُون — root: خ-ش-ع

The concrete sense of the root is given by the lexicographers as follows: to sink low, to subside, the lowering of the voice, the dropping of the eye. From the same root:

WordMeaning
خَشَعَHe sank low, he submitted, he lowered his voice
خَاشِعَةDried, subsided ground (Fuṣṣilat 41/39tarā'l-arḍa khāshiʿatan)
خُشُوعThe lowering of voice and gaze; the outward showing of an inward bowing

The use of the root for ground was treated at Fuṣṣilat 41/39 (ground subsided before the rain, then swelling afterwards), and khāshiʿa occurred in al-Nāziʿāt (79/9abṣārun yawmaʾidhin khāshiʿa).

Two sides of the root must be recorded, and this is the lexicographers' common description: khushūʿ is something that takes place both inside and outside. The lowering of the voice and the dropping of the gaze are the visible side; the bowing of the heart is the side that is not visible. The word answers to both at once.

فِى صَلَاتِهِمْ — the particle, and the singular

Two details must be recorded:

One. The particle is — "inside". Khushūʿ is sought not beside the prayer but inside it. The adverbial phrase frames the prayer as a vessel.

Two. Ṣalāt is singular. In the ninth verse the same word will come in the plural (ṣalawātihim). This difference is too regular to be counted accidental, and it will be tabulated at the ninth verse.

I give this as my own reading, and its ground is the contrast of singular and plural: the second verse looks inside one prayer — the prayer being performed. The ninth verse will look at the whole of the prayers.


23/3

وَٱلَّذِينَ هُمْ عَنِ ٱللَّغْوِ مُعْرِضُونَ

wa'lladhīna hum ʿani'l-laghwi muʿriḍūn

"They are those who turn away from idle speech."

لَغْو

The root was worked out in detail at al-Wāqiʿa 56/25 (lā yasmaʿūna fīhā laghwan wa lā taʾthīmā). I do not repeat it here. The description given there is this:

The description the lexicographers give: speech or action that is not reckoned, that goes for nothing. Laghwa'l-shayʾu — it became worthless, it did not count.

And in al-Wāqiʿa this very verse was cited to show the place of the word within the Qurʾān. I rely on that treatment. The links of the word across this series are the following, and the fifth is here:

PlaceUseWhat it does
al-Wāqiʿa 56/25lā yasmaʿūna fīhā laghwanAbsent in the garden — removed
Fuṣṣilat 41/26wa'lghaw fīhiA tactic — the other side makes noise
al-Qaṣaṣ 28/55wa idhā samiʿū'l-laghwa aʿraḍū ʿanhA reaction — turning away on hearing it
al-Furqān 25/72idhā marrū bi'l-laghwi marrū kirāmāAn attribute — passing it by with dignity
al-Muʾminūn 23/3ʿani'l-laghwi muʿriḍūnAn attribute — a standing state

The difference between al-Qaṣaṣ 28/55 and this verse is worth recording, since both use the same verb (أعرض):

al-Qaṣaṣ 28/55al-Muʾminūn 23/3
Patternidhā samiʿū … aʿraḍū — perfect, tied to a conditionmuʿriḍūn — active participle, unconditioned
What it reportsA reaction given in the face of an eventA settled state
Triggersamiʿūwhen they hearNone — no conditional clause is framed

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the difference between the two patterns: al-Qaṣaṣ describes an answer given to speech that is heard; al-Muʾminūn reports an orientation. The active participle records not the recurrence of an event but the stance of the person.

أَعْرَضَ — root: ع-ر-ض

The concrete sense of the root: to show the ʿarḍ of a thing, that is, its breadth, its side. Aʿraḍa ʿanhu — he turned away from it; the picture in the word is turning not the face but the side.

And this verb will occur once more in the sūra — but on the other side: in the seventy-first verse, fa-hum ʿan dhikrihim muʿriḍūn — "turning away from their own reminder". The same active participle, in the same pattern, over two different objects.

VerseWhat is turned away fromVerdict
3al-laghw — idle speechAn attribute — included in deliverance
71dhikruhum — the reminder that comes to themA fault — the name of refusal

This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra. And I record this as my own reading: the verb is neither good nor bad in itself; what settles the verdict is what is being turned away from. Something like the same distinction was recorded for the verb fariḥa at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/75.


23/4

وَٱلَّذِينَ هُمْ لِلزَّكَوٰةِ فَٰعِلُونَ

wa'lladhīna hum li'l-zakāti fāʿilūn

"They are those who carry out the zakāt."

ز-ك-و

The root was treated in detail at al-Shams 91/9 (qad aflaḥa man zakkāhā) and taken up again in ʿAbasa (laʿallahū yazzakkā). I do not repeat it here. The summary recorded there is this:

Beneath the root two senses stand togetherpurification and growth. Tazkiya is growth brought about by reduction.

فَاعِلُون — the choice of verb

And a detail of word order must be recorded here: the verse does not say yuʾtūna'l-zakāta (they give the zakāt) — which is the common counterpart of the word in other verses. The verb chosen here is فعل: "to do, to perform".

Two readings of the meaning of the word are transmitted:

ReadingWhat zakāt isIts ground
1Giving a fixed portion of one's propertyzakāt in the institutional senseThe common use of the word in the Qurʾān
2The work of purification — the act that cleanses the self and the propertyThe original sense of the root; and the sūra being Meccan

The ground of the second reading must also be recorded: the institutional form of zakāt, fixed by amount and threshold, took shape, as it is transmitted, in the Medinan period; and this sūra is counted Meccan. This does not make the second reading necessary — the word zakāt occurs in Meccan verses too — but it shows the source of the dispute.

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. And I issue no legal ruling: the threshold, the rate and the categories of zakāt have been discussed in detail among the schools of law, and that is not the subject of this commentary.

On the choice of verb I give the following as my own reading: the word fāʿilūn is wider than giving. Fiʿl reports a work, an action. The item therefore stays wide enough to take in not only the moment of transfer but the work done towards purification.


23/5-7

وَٱلَّذِينَ هُمْ لِفُرُوجِهِمْ حَٰفِظُونَ · إِلَّا عَلَىٰٓ أَزْوَٰجِهِمْ أَوْ مَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُهُمْ فَإِنَّهُمْ غَيْرُ مَلُومِينَ · فَمَنِ ٱبْتَغَىٰ وَرَآءَ ذَٰلِكَ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْعَادُونَ

wa'lladhīna hum li-furūjihim ḥāfiẓūn · illā ʿalā azwājihim aw mā malakat aymānuhum fa-innahum ghayru malūmīn · fa-mani'btaghā warāʾa dhālika fa-ulāʾika humu'l-ʿādūn

"They are those who guard their chastity — except with their spouses…; in that they are not blamed. Whoever seeks beyond that — those are the ones who transgress."

فُرُوج — root: ف-ر-ج

The concrete sense of the root: the opening, the cleft, the gap between two things. Faraj — an interval; infirāj — an opening out; and from here comes the sense of the opening up of distress (faraj — relief).

In this context the word is a figure used for the private parts, and the lexicographers record it as such. And there is a point worth recording: the same root is used in the Qurʾān for the sky as well — mā lahā min furūj (Qāf 50/6, "it has no cracks in it"). That verse was treated in Qāf. The same root: in one place the proof of an unbroken surface, in the other the area that is to be guarded. I record this as an observation about the language, and I build no connection of ruling between the two uses.

حَافِظُون — and the breadth of the item

Ḥāfiẓ: guarding, watching over. The root ح-ف-ظ was treated at al-Burūj 85/22 (fī lawḥin maḥfūẓ) and at al-Ṭāriq 86/4 (laysa ʿalayhā ḥāfiẓ).

A detail of word order must be recorded, and the lexicographers dwell on it: in the fifth verse the particle is لِ (li-furūjihim), and in the exception in the sixth verse the particle turns to عَلَىٰ (illā ʿalā azwājihim).

Two approaches to explaining this change are transmitted:

ReadingExplanation
1The exception attaches not to the verb ḥāfiẓūn but to the sentence as a whole; ʿalā carries the sense "with regard to…"
2Ḥāfiẓūn here means "those who hold themselves back", and ʿalā marks the place where that holding back is lifted

Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

مَا مَلَكَتْ أَيْمَٰنُهُمْ

The construction names an institution that in fact existed in the period the Qurʾān was revealed — slavery. Per the method (Method), I issue no legal ruling here and I do not go into the details of the historical institution. Two matters must be recorded, and both can be verified from the text:

One. The Qurʾān does not establish this institution; it names an arrangement it found already in place in the society into which it was revealed.

Two. Other verses of the Qurʾān in the same field set the release from slavery again and again as a good, an expiation and a goal: fakku raqaba (al-Balad 90/13 — treated in al-Balad), fa-taḥrīru raqaba (al-Nisāʾ 4/92, al-Māʾida 5/89, al-Mujādala 58/3 — treated in al-Mujādala), fa-kātibūhum (al-Nūr 24/33).

Beyond these two entries I draw no conclusion. The historical and legal frame of the matter cannot be settled under this verse, and no attempt is made to settle it.

ٱلْعَادُون — root: ع-د-و

The concrete sense of the root: to cross a boundary, to step over it. From the same root come ʿaduww (enemy — the one who tramples the boundary), ʿudwān (transgression), ʿadā (he ran, he crossed).

The choice of word is worth recording: the seventh verse does not say "sinners" or "fāsiqūn". The picture in the word is the crossing of a line — and the sixth verse had just drawn that line. The verdict, that is, is attached to the boundary that has been drawn.


23/8

وَٱلَّذِينَ هُمْ لِأَمَٰنَٰتِهِمْ وَعَهْدِهِمْ رَٰعُونَ

wa'lladhīna hum li-amānātihim wa ʿahdihim rāʿūn

"They are those who watch over their trusts and their covenant."

أَمَانَات and عَهْد — plural and singular

A detail of word order must be recorded: amānāt has come in the plural, ʿahd in the singular.

The explanations the lexicographers give for this difference are transmitted:

ExplanationGround
1Trusts are many and various (property, a word, an office, a secret); a covenant is a single kind of binding
2ʿAhd here is a generic noun; its coming in the singular does not exclude plurality
3Among the variant readings a reading li-amānati (singular) is also transmitted; on that reading both words are singular

The variant reading must be recorded here: the readings li-amānātihim (plural) and li-amānatihim (singular) are transmitted. It produces no radical change in meaning — one reports the trusts one by one, the other the kind "trust".

The root أ-م-ن was treated at the first verse. What belongs here is this: amāna and īmān are from the same root. The name of the sūra and the name of this item, that is, come from one root. I record this as a datum of the language; I draw no ruling from it, but I give this much as an observation: the root derives being trustworthy and trusting from the same place.

رَاعُون — root: ر-ع-ي

The concrete sense of the root: to pasture an animal, to watch over it. Rāʿī — shepherd; raʿy — pasturing; riʿāya — watching over, tending.

The choice of word is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading, its ground being the pastoral sense of the root: ḥifẓ (the verb in the fifth verse) is to hold, to keep — it is static. Riʿāya is to keep the eye on a thing continually; the shepherd stands at the head of the flock, walks, counts. The two items use two different verbs: one for guarding, the other for watching over.


23/9

وَٱلَّذِينَ هُمْ عَلَىٰ صَلَوَٰتِهِمْ يُحَافِظُونَ

wa'lladhīna hum ʿalā ṣalawātihim yuḥāfiẓūn

"They keep watch over their prayers."

The frame of the list — opening with the prayer and closing with the prayer

This is the clearest structural element of the sūra, and it can be counted directly from the text: the list consists of six items, and the first item and the sixth are on the same subject — the prayer.

OrderVerseField
12The prayer
23Speech — laghw
34Property — zakāt
45-7The body — furūj
58Relationship — amāna and ʿahd
69The prayer

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the list's own arrangement: the four items in between are speech, property, the body and relationship — that is, the four fields in which a person comes into contact with others. The list takes these four fields between its two items on prayer. The frame is outside, life is inside.

And the lexicographers record this frame as well; but the meaning loaded onto the frame is interpretation, and I do not present the reading above as binding.

The difference in wording between the two items on prayer

The differences between the two verses can be counted one by one, and all four are regular:

23/223/9
The wordṢalātsingularṢalawātplural
The particleinsideʿAlāover / above
Kind of predicateKhāshiʿūnactive participle (a noun)Yuḥāfiẓūnimperfect (a verb)
The form of the verbForm I (khashaʿa)Form III (ḥāfaẓa) — continuity and reciprocity
What it reportsAn inward stateAn ongoing guarding

All four differences can be verified from the text. And the reading I build on them is the following, which I give as my own reading:

One. Singular and plural. The second verse looks inside a prayer being performed; the ninth looks at the whole of the prayers, that is, at the appointed times and the order.

Two. ʿalā. reports the inside, ʿalā a watching from above. One tells of what is inside the prayer, the other of standing over the prayer.

Three. Noun and verb. In Arabic a nominal sentence reports fixity (thubūt), a verbal sentence renewal (tajaddud); this is a distinction the lexicographers record consistently. Khushūʿ is given as a settled state, keeping watch as a repeated work.

Four. Form III. The pattern ḥāfaẓa, unlike ḥafiẓa of Form I, reports continuity and reciprocal effort. The same root appeared in the fifth verse as ḥāfiẓūn (active participle, from Form I).

To draw it together — and this drawing together is my own reading: the list opens with the state inside the prayer and closes with the keeping up of the prayers. The difference between the two is the difference between one prayer and a lifetime of prayer. And the list places between the two all the fields in which a person makes contact.


23/10-11

أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْوَٰرِثُونَ · ٱلَّذِينَ يَرِثُونَ ٱلْفِرْدَوْسَ هُمْ فِيهَا خَٰلِدُونَ

ulāʾika humu'l-wārithūn · alladhīna yarithūna'l-firdawsa hum fīhā khālidūn

"Those are the heirs — who will inherit al-Firdaws; there they remain."

أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ — the return of the verdict

The word order must be recorded: the conditional clause that has run for nine verses is gathered up in the tenth by a demonstrative pronoun. Ulāʾika — "those are the ones". And it is reinforced by the pronoun of separation (hum): in Arabic this pronoun, coming between subject and predicate, reports specification.

The sentence, that is, is closer to "the ones who are heirs are precisely these" than to "they are heirs".

و-ر-ث — inheritance

The sense of the root: the passing of a property or a standing from its owner to another. Wārith — the one who takes what passes; mīrāth — the thing that passes.

The choice of word is worth recording, and it has two sides:

One. An inheritance is not something earned by working for it — it passes from another. Two. But being an heir depends on a qualification — kinship, entitlement, standing.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being this double character of the word: after nine verses of enumerated acts, the outcome is given not with a word for earning but with a word for transfer. The outcome, that is, is named not as the price of the acts enumerated but as something that passes to those who carry them.

The same root was treated at al-Dukhān 44/28 (wa awrathnāhā qawman ākharīn) and in al-Shuʿarāʾ — there the inheritance was what a destroyed people left behind. The same word, in two different directions.

ٱلْفِرْدَوْس

The word occurs in two places in the Qurʾān: here, and al-Kahf 18/107 (jannāti'l-firdaws).

The lexicographers differ over the origin of the word:

ViewExplanation
1It is Arabicfirdaws, a garden enclosed about, with trees and vines
2It is a foreign word taken into Arabic — of Persian/Syriac origin, "a garden surrounded by a wall"

Both views are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The point at which the two views meet is worth recording: at the core of the word lies the idea of an enclosed, protected garden.

And the pronoun must be recorded: hum fīhā khālidūn — a feminine singular pronoun. Firdaws is counted masculine; the lexicographers record that the pronoun refers back to the word janna (at al-Kahf 18/107 the construction is jannāti'l-firdaws).

The end of the block — where the list is attached

And a structural entry: the list closes with a place. This overlaps with the closing of the ʿibādu'l-raḥmān list treated in al-Furqān — there too the list closed with a place: ulāʾika yujzawna'l-ghurfata bimā ṣabarū (25/75). Two lists, in two separate sūras, both ending with the name of a dwelling. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.


The two lists of attributes — al-Muʾminūn 23/1-11 and al-Furqān 25/63-77

This comparison is required by this commentary, because the two lists do the same work in two separate sūras of the Qurʾān: they describe the one who will attain deliverance not by a name but by a series of attributes. In al-Furqān that list was treated item by item; here a comparison is made, the analysis is not repeated.

The difference in position

al-Muʾminūn 23/1-11al-Furqān 25/63-77
Its place in the sūraThe opening — the first eleven versesThe closing — the last fifteen verses
What precedes itNothing — the sūra begins with the listA chain of objections (25/4-8) and the question wa mā'l-raḥmān (25/60)
The name of the listal-Muʾminūn — by way of faithʿIbādu'l-Raḥmān — by way of service and of a name
Where the verdict fallsAt the start (23/1) and at the end (23/10-11)At the end (25/75-76)
The closingal-Firdaws — an inheritanceal-Ghurfa — a recompense
The grammaralladhīna hum + fronted complement + nounalladhīna + verb (for the most part)

The difference in position is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: the al-Muʾminūn list is not an answer to anything — the sūra begins with it, there is no objection in the middle. The al-Furqān list, as was shown in al-Furqān, is an indirect answer to the objection in the seventh verse of that sūra, and its first item (walking) is precisely the subject of that objection. One is framed as a description, then, the other as an answer.

An item-by-item comparison

Fieldal-Muʾminūn 23al-Furqān 25Status
Prayer / night worship2 — fī ṣalātihim khāshiʿūn · 9 — ʿalā ṣalawātihim yuḥāfiẓūn64 — yabītūna li-rabbihim sujjadan wa qiyāmāShared — the forms differ
Idle speech (laghw)3 — ʿani'l-laghwi muʿriḍūn72 — idhā marrū bi'l-laghwi marrū kirāmāShared — the same word
Property4 — li'l-zakāti fāʿilūn67 — lam yusrifū wa lam yaqturū … qawāmāShared — one an act, the other a measure
Chastity5-7 — li-furūjihim ḥāfiẓūn + the exception + al-ʿādūn68 — wa lā yaznūnShared — one a guarding, the other a prohibition
Trust and covenant8 — li-amānātihim wa ʿahdihim rāʿūn72 — lā yashhadūna'l-zūr (a neighbouring field)Explicit only in al-Muʾminūn
Walking / bearingAbsent63 — yamshūna ʿalā'l-arḍi hawnāOnly in al-Furqān
The answer to the ignorantAbsent63 — qālū salāmāOnly in al-Furqān
Associating partners, and killingAbsent (separately at the end of the sūra, at 117)68 — lā yadʿūna … wa lā yaqtulūna'l-nafsOnly in al-Furqān
The door of repentanceAbsent70-71 — illā man tāba … yubaddilu'llāhu sayyiʾātihim ḥasanātOnly in al-Furqān
The prayer for protection from the FireAbsent65-66 — iṣrif ʿannā ʿadhāba jahannamOnly in al-Furqān
The bearing towards the versesAbsent (treated separately in the sūra at 66 and 105)73 — lam yakhirrū ʿalayhā ṣumman wa ʿumyānāOnly in al-Furqān
The prayer for one's familyAbsent74 — hab lanā min azwājinā … qurrata aʿyunOnly in al-Furqān

Observations that follow from the comparison

What follows is my own reading and is not binding; its grounds are the table above.

One. The shared items are four: prayer, idle speech, property, chastity. And these four are fields present in the daily life of every human being. The two lists meet on common ground in these four fields.

Two. The item on laghw is in both lists, and in both the verb is "to pass by" or "to turn away" — in neither is it "to silence", "to prevent", "to answer". The two sūras propose the same bearing on this item: not removal but not making contact.

Three. The al-Furqān list is longer than the al-Muʾminūn list and contains more items about "relationship" — walking, the answer to the ignorant, the prayer for one's family, the request to lead. The al-Muʾminūn list contains more items about "obligation" — prayer, zakāt, chastity, trust.

Four. The item on trust and covenant is explicitly present only in al-Muʾminūn. And it stands immediately before the sixth item of the list, that is, right inside the frame.

Five. Both lists end with a dwellingal-Firdaws and al-Ghurfa. And neither gives a name on its own: al-Muʾminūn says "they will inherit", al-Furqān says "they will be recompensed for their patience". In both places the outcome comes after a verb.

Six — and I record this separately: the two lists are neither copies of one another nor complements of one another. Each is bound to the work of its own sūra: al-Furqān is answering an objection, al-Muʾminūn is building a description. Two different structures come out of the same material — and this shows that reading the lists as a "sum of items" falls short.


23/12

وَلَقَدْ خَلَقْنَا ٱلْإِنسَٰنَ مِن سُلَٰلَةٍ مِّن طِينٍ

wa laqad khalaqnā'l-insāna min sulālatin min ṭīn

"We created the human being, assuredly, from an extract of clay."

The limit of this block — the methodological note, set at the very start

These verses belong to a field treated several times across this series, and the same limit was drawn each time. I set that limit here too, at the outset:

At Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/67: "the dictionary senses of the words nuṭfa and ʿalaqa are given by the lexicographers. I do not enter into equating these one-to-one with the terms of modern embryology; the work of the verse is to give a description of stages, and the proof lies in these stages not being in human hands."
At al-Zumar 39/6: "at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/67 the same staged formation was told in six steps, and the methodological limit was drawn there: one does not enter into equating these expressions one-to-one with the terms of modern embryology. I keep the same limit here."
At al-Sajda 32/7-9 the same field was treated; in al-ʿAlaq a section with five grounds was written on the word ʿalaq and the embryological claim was rejected; and in the al-Qiyāma, al-Ṭāriq, al-Mursalāt, al-Najm, Yāsīn and Nūḥ sections the same position was kept.

I keep the same limit here and do not repeat its grounds. In brief: the dictionary sense of the words is given and not cut short; but this is not presented as the claim of the verse and is not turned into a proof of miracle. What will be treated in these verses is the meanings of the words and the ordering of the verbs — not a table of development.

And one further entry, as it was written in al-Mursalāt: the argument of the verse sets out from something the one addressed knows. Birth, miscarriage, bone and flesh were things everyone saw. A proof cannot be built with something the one addressed does not know; for this reason dressing the verse in modern knowledge does not strengthen the argument but weakens it.

سُلَالَة — root: س-ل-ل

The root was worked out at al-Sajda 32/8 (thumma jaʿala naslahū min sulālatin min māʾin mahīn). I do not repeat it here. The summary given there:

The concrete sense of the root: to draw a thing slowly out of its sheath, stripping it clear. Salla'l-sayfa — he drew the sword from its scabbard. Sulālathe extract drawn out of a thing. Salīl — lineage, offspring.

What belongs here is the difference between the two verses, and it must be recorded:

al-Sajda 32/8al-Muʾminūn 23/12
The extract of whatmin sulālatin min māʾin mahīn — the extract of a despised fluidmin sulālatin min ṭīn — the extract of clay
Of whomnaslahū — the human being's offspringal-insānthe human being
Where it standsThe second step of the creationThe beginning of the creation

The difference is worth recording: in al-Sajda sulāla reports the source of the offspring, here the source of the human being. And read together the two verses complete each other: al-Sajda had said first that the beginning was from clay (badaʾa khalqa'l-insāni min ṭīn) and then that the offspring came from a fluid; al-Muʾminūn joins the two in a single constructionsulālatin min ṭīn.

مِن طِين

طِينclay: the mixture of earth and water. The word was treated at al-Sajda 32/7 and at al-Ṣāffāt 37/11 (min ṭīnin lāzib — sticky clay).

And the twofold repetition of the particle min must be recorded: min sulālatin min ṭīn. There are two steps: clay → the extract drawn from clay → the human being. The verse, that is, does not say "from clay" directly; it places an operation in between.

I record this as an observation about the word order, and its ground is the second min: an operation is set between the material and the product.


23/13

ثُمَّ جَعَلْنَٰهُ نُطْفَةً فِى قَرَارٍ مَّكِينٍ

thumma jaʿalnāhu nuṭfatan fī qarārin makīn

"Then We made him a drop in a secure lodging."

نُطْفَة

Root ن-ط-ف: the core sense the lexicographers give is to drip, to trickle. Naṭafa'l-māʾ — the water dripped; nuṭfa — a small quantity of water, a drop. The word was treated at al-Qiyāma 75/37 (a-lam yaku nuṭfatan min maniyyin yumnā), at al-Insān 76/2 (min nuṭfatin amshāj) and at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/67. I do not repeat it here.

The methodological limit was set above; the meaning of the word consists of this, and no technical description is built upon it.

قَرَارٍ مَّكِين — two words

قَرَار — root ق-ر-ر: to stand in a place, to be fixed, to settle. From the same root come qarār (the place one stops), mustaqarr (a place of settlement), qurra (the cooling of the eye — the eye coming to rest in one place; treated at al-Furqān 25/74).

مَكِين — root م-ك-ن: to have a place, to become firm. Makān is from the same root. Makīnfirm in place, strong in standing. The word is used in the Qurʾān of a human being as well: innaka'l-yawma ladaynā makīnun amīn (Yūsuf 12/54).

The build of the construction must be recorded: qarārin makīn — "a firm resting place". Both words report fixity, and one comes as the adjective of the other. There is emphasis, that is.

And this construction will come back once more in the sūra: in the fiftieth verse the place in which the son of Mary and his mother are sheltered will be named rabwatin dhāti qarārin wa maʿīn. The same word: one the place at the beginning of the forming, the other a refuge. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation: both places are sheltered, and both are named with the word qarār.

The change of verb — from خَلَقْنَا to جَعَلْنَا

And here the real question of the block begins. In the twelfth verse the verb was khalaqnā; in the thirteenth it turns to jaʿalnā.

The distinction was recorded at al-Zukhruf 43/3 and holds here:

Jaʿala in Arabic reports the putting of a thing from one state into another — this is what separates it from khalaqa (to bring into being from nothing).

At the second step, that is, nothing new is brought into being; what exists is put from one state into another. This is the first link of the chain of verbs that will be tabulated at the fourteenth verse.


23/14

ثُمَّ خَلَقْنَا ٱلنُّطْفَةَ عَلَقَةً فَخَلَقْنَا ٱلْعَلَقَةَ مُضْغَةً فَخَلَقْنَا ٱلْمُضْغَةَ عِظَٰمًا فَكَسَوْنَا ٱلْعِظَٰمَ لَحْمًا ثُمَّ أَنشَأْنَٰهُ خَلْقًا ءَاخَرَ فَتَبَارَكَ ٱللَّهُ أَحْسَنُ ٱلْخَٰلِقِينَ

thumma khalaqnā'l-nuṭfata ʿalaqatan fa-khalaqnā'l-ʿalaqata muḍghatan fa-khalaqnā'l-muḍghata ʿiẓāman fa-kasawnā'l-ʿiẓāma laḥman thumma anshaʾnāhu khalqan ākhar, fa-tabāraka'llāhu aḥsanu'l-khāliqīn

"Then We made that drop an ʿalaqa, and made the ʿalaqa a morsel, and made the morsel bones, and clothed the bones with flesh. Then We built him up as another creation. How exalted is God, the best of creators!"

The words — kept to their dictionary sense

The limit set above holds for all three of these words.

WordRootThe sense the lexicographers giveWhere in this series
عَلَقَةع-ل-قSomething that hangs, holds on, clings; and a clot; and a leech (ʿalaq)al-ʿAlaq 96/2 — with the limit section on five grounds
مُضْغَةم-ض-غA piece the size of one chewmaḍgh, to chewHere for the first time in this series
عِظَامع-ظ-مBonesʿaẓm; from the root, ʿaẓīm (great, hard)Yāsīn 36/78, al-Qiyāma 75/3

The section written on the word ʿalaq in al-ʿAlaq holds here too, and I do not repeat it here. The conclusion there was this: the sense of the word — "hanging, holding on, clinging" — is given and not cut short; but it cannot be presented as the claim of the verse and cannot be turned into a proof of miracle.

An addition on مُضْغَة: the word reports a measure — the amount taken into the mouth at one time. The picture in the word, that is, is of size, not of shape. I give this as an entry about the language.

The ordering of the verbs — the real subject of this block

The verse tells the forming with seven verbs, and the verbs are not the same. This is a fact that can be counted directly from the text:

OrderConnectiveVerbRoot / formWhat it does
1khalaqnā (12)خ-ل-قCreated — the human being, from the extract of clay
2ثُمَّjaʿalnā (13)ج-ع-لPut from one state into another — a drop
3ثُمَّkhalaqnāخ-ل-قDrop → ʿalaqa
4فَfa-khalaqnāخ-ل-قʿAlaqamuḍgha
5فَfa-khalaqnāخ-ل-قMuḍgha → bones
6فَfa-kasawnāك-س-وClothed — the bones with flesh
7ثُمَّthumma anshaʾnāhuن-ش-أBuilt up — as another creation

Three regularities can be counted:

One. Thumma occurs three times, fa three times. In Arabic fa reports succession without a gap, thumma succession with a gap; this is the lexicographers' common entry.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being this distinction between the two particles: the three occurrences of thumma stand at three points — human being→drop, drop→ʿalaqa, and after the flesh has been put on→another creation. The text, that is, sets a gap at three places; the steps in between are given joined to one another with fa. Three thresholds, four adjoining steps.

Two. The verb is khalaqnā four times, then once kasawnā, then once anshaʾnā. That is, the verb changes in the last two steps.

Three. Each time, the object is the object of the preceding sentence, and it comes definite with the article alif-lām: al-nuṭfata → al-ʿalaqata → al-muḍghata → al-ʿiẓāma. The chain is built at the level of the words as well: each sentence makes the product of the one before it its own material. This is a form of takrīr that the lexicographers record.

فَكَسَوْنَا ٱلْعِظَٰمَ لَحْمًا — "We clothed"

The root ك-س-و is worked out here for the first time in this series. The concrete sense of the root: to clothe with a garment. Kiswa — clothing; kisāʾ — a wrap taken over oneself; iksāʾ — the act of clothing.

And the choice of verb must be recorded: the verse does not say khalaqnā here. While "We created" is said at five steps, at the sixth "We clothed" is said.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being this single change of verb: at the other steps one thing turned into another — the drop became an ʿalaqa, the ʿalaqa became a morsel. Here there is no turning: the bone remains bone, and something else is put over it. The verb carries this difference. To clothe does not require the disappearance of what is clothed.

And a link between words is worth recording: the same idea is used in the Qurʾān for a garment as well — wa jaʿalnā'l-layla libāsā (al-Nabaʾ 78/10; treated in al-Nabaʾ and at al-Furqān 25/47). The root is different (ل-ب-س / ك-س-و) and I build no derivational link between them; what is shared is the idea that a covering does not do away with what lies beneath it.

ثُمَّ أَنشَأْنَٰهُ خَلْقًا ءَاخَرَ — the centre of gravity of the block

This sentence deserves separate and detailed treatment.

أَنشَأَ — root: ن-ش-أ

The root was worked out at al-Wāqiʿa 56/35 (innā anshaʾnāhunna inshāʾā) and at 56/62 (wa laqad ʿalimtumu'l-nashʾata'l-ūlā). I do not repeat it here. In summary, what was recorded there is this:

The verb is anshaʾnā — not "We created" but "We built up". The verse reports a rebuilding. And the same root is used at 56/62 for birth in this world: al-nashʾata'l-ūlā — "the first building up".

And the following point recorded in al-Wāqiʿa attaches directly here: al-Wāqiʿa used the verb it applies to the garden, twenty-seven verses later, for the forming in this world. al-Muʾminūn, for its part, uses the same verb for the last step of the forming in this world.

The other links of the root across this series: al-Mulk 67/23 (alladhī anshaʾakum), al-Wāqiʿa 56/72 (am naḥnu'l-munshiʾūn).

The word order of the sentence

Three details must be recorded:

One. The particle is thumma — that is, a gap is set between this and what precedes. The largest gap among the seven steps is here, because after this thumma the verb changes as well.

Two. The object pronoun is هُ — "him". That is, the same being continues. The sentence does not say "We created something else"; it says "We built him up as another creation". The continuity of the subject is preserved by the pronoun.

Three. Khalqan ākhar — the lexicographers differ over its parsing:

ViewParsingMeaning
1Absolute object (reporting the kind)"We built him up with a building of another kind"
2Circumstantial accusative"We built him up in the state of another creation"
3A second objectanshaʾa here in the sense of jaʿala"We made him another creature"

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. What is common to all three is this: what is new is not the material but the kind.

What "another creation" is — and why one stops here

The verse does not say what it is. This is a silence of the text, and it must be recorded.

The explanations widely transmitted in the classical exegetical tradition are these:

#ExplanationGround
1The breathing of the spiritJoining it with wa nafakha fīhi min rūḥihī at al-Sajda 32/9
2Coming alive and moving — the passage from a lifeless mass to a living beingThe sense of the verb (anshaʾa) "to set up and stand upright"
3The giving of the human faculties — reason, speech, discriminationThe verse ending with aḥsanu'l-khāliqīn
4Birth — the coming outThumma reporting a large gap

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference. And an entry, per the method (Method): since the verse gives no modality, no modality is produced here. The entry set for the construction min rūḥihī at al-Sajda 32/9 holds here as well.

The only thing I record as my own reading is this, and its ground is the change of verb: after steps that can be counted, the verse sets a step that cannot be counted. The preceding six steps change the object; the seventh changes the kind. And the text does not give the name of that kind. This silence can be read as a part of the structure of the verse: after the part that can be told has been told, a threshold is set.

فَتَبَارَكَ ٱللَّهُ أَحْسَنُ ٱلْخَٰلِقِينَ

تَبَارَكَthe root ب-ر-ك was worked out at al-Mulk 67/1 and treated again at al-Furqān 25/1. I do not repeat it here. In summary: the core of the root is baraka — the kneeling of the camel, settling in a place and staying fixed; and from this, a good that lasts and increases.

And the word order must be recorded: the sentence begins with fa. The praise, that is, comes as the outcome of the process described — it is not an independent sentence.

أَحْسَنُ ٱلْخَٰلِقِين — "the best of creators". The lexicographers dwell on the construction, because the elative is built with a plural.

ReadingExplanation
1In Arabic the verb خلق is also used in the sense of "to give shape to an existing material, to fashion" (thus at al-Māʾida 5/110 takhluqu mina'l-ṭīni occurs of Jesus (ʿĪsā)). The construction is built according to this usage of the language
2The speech is framed in the language the one addressed accepts: they called others "creator" too; the verse points, from inside that language, to the highest of them
3The elative here reports not comparison but absolute pre-eminence (this usage is recorded in Arabic)

All three are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. And I do not enter a theological dispute: no ruling about the existence of other creators is drawn from the construction — indeed the ninety-first verse of the sūra will establish exactly the opposite.

A link within the sūra must be recorded: this is the first of the five superlative constructions in the sūra. The others: khayru'l-munzilīn (29), khayru'l-rāziqīn (72), khayru'l-rāḥimīn (109 and 118). All five of the five constructions are built on the agent of a verb — creating, sending down, providing, showing mercy. This is a pattern that can be verified within the sūra.


23/15-16

ثُمَّ إِنَّكُم بَعْدَ ذَٰلِكَ لَمَيِّتُونَ · ثُمَّ إِنَّكُمْ يَوْمَ ٱلْقِيَٰمَةِ تُبْعَثُونَ

thumma innakum baʿda dhālika la-mayyitūn · thumma innakum yawma'l-qiyāmati tubʿathūn

"Then, after that, you will surely die. Then, on the Day of Resurrection, you will be raised."

The change of pronoun

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the block: what is told from the twelfth verse to the fourteenth is in the third person (al-insān, jaʿalnāhu, anshaʾnāhu). In the fifteenth verse the address turns to the second person: innakum — "you".

This is an operation called iltifāt (a shift in the direction of address) in Arabic rhetoric.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being that the change of pronoun falls exactly at this point: while the forming is being told, the one addressed is outside — what is told is a third party. When death and resurrection are named, the one addressed is brought inside. The process described thereby stops being a piece of information and becomes a piece of news.

Two occurrences of thumma, and two patterns

VersePatternWhat it reports
15innakum … la-mayyitūnactive participle, reinforced with lāmA settled, unavoidable state
16innakum … tubʿathūnimperfect verb, passiveA work to be done — whose agent is not named

The difference is worth recording: death is given as a state (with a noun), resurrection as a work (with a verb). And the verb of the resurrection is passive — the doer is not named, because it is being named throughout the sūra anyway.

مَيِّتُون — the lexicographers dwell on the pattern of the word: a distinction between mayyit and māʾit is transmitted; the first is one who has died, the second one who is going to die. Here the meaning is "those who are going to die", and the lexicographers record that the pattern mayyit is used in this sense as well.

Context — how the chain of proofs is built

And the logic of the block must be recorded: twelve to fourteen tell that the human being passes through a process that can be seen. Fifteen and sixteen add two further steps to the same sentence: death and resurrection.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being that the three occurrences of thumma stand in one and the same series: the text does not build a separate proof for the resurrection — it presents it as a link in the series it is already working through. The same method was treated at Yāsīn 36/77-79 and at al-Qiyāma 75/36-40. I rely on that treatment.


23/17

وَلَقَدْ خَلَقْنَا فَوْقَكُمْ سَبْعَ طَرَآئِقَ وَمَا كُنَّا عَنِ ٱلْخَلْقِ غَٰفِلِينَ

wa laqad khalaqnā fawqakum sabʿa ṭarāʾiqa wa mā kunnā ʿani'l-khalqi ghāfilīn

"We created above you seven paths, assuredly. And We have not been heedless of the creation."

طَرَآئِق — root: ط-ر-ق

The root was worked out in al-Ṭāriq. The description given there: the original sense of the root is to strike, to beat, to hit with something hard. I do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is the second branch of the root, and the lexicographers record the two together:

WordMeaningThe link
طَرَقَTo strike, to hitThe core of the root
طَرِيقRoadThe track opened by feet striking it again and again — the explanation the lexicographers give
مِطْرَقَةHammerThe instrument of striking
طَرِيقَةA road; and a layer of a thing laid one over anotherThe two branches
طَرَائِقThe plural of ṭarīqaThe word here

The lexicographers differ over what the word reports in this verse:

ReadingWhat ṭarāʾiq isIts ground
1The seven heavens — a naming that stands in place of samāwātfawqakum (above you) and the number "seven"; at the sūra's 86th verse al-samāwāti'l-sabʿ occurs explicitly
2Layers laid one over anotherThe sense of the word ṭarīqa as "a layer over a thing"
3Paths — the paths down which the angels or the affairs descendThe original sense of the root

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference. The first reading has a ground within the sūra, and I record it: the eighty-sixth verse will say rabbu'l-samāwāti'l-sabʿ. The same sūra names the same number with two different words.

And a limit, per the method (Method): on the basis of this verse I do not enter into any matching with layers of the atmosphere, belts of celestial bodies or similar modern classifications. The grounds written in al-Ṭāriq for astronomical claims and in al-ʿAlaq for embryological claims hold here as well. The meaning of the word is given; nothing is built beyond it.

وَمَا كُنَّا عَنِ ٱلْخَلْقِ غَٰفِلِينَ

The sentence is worth recording, and it is the key to this block.

The root غ-ف-ل: to remain unaware of a thing, to let it slip from mind, to give it no attention. Ghafla — inattention; ghufl — bearing no mark upon it, unrecognised.

The word order must be recorded: mā kunnā — a negated perfect, "We have not been". That is, at no time. And ʿani'l-khalqi has been brought forward (taqdīm): "of the creation — We are not heedless."

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the place of the sentence in the verse: after the seven layers have been named, the sentence one expects is a statement of power. The sentence that comes is a statement of attention. The verse, that is, speaks not of greatness but of not having been left.

The same idea was recorded in al-Fātiḥa in the analysis of the name Rabb: "Rabb is the name of an order that is working; not of a clock wound up and abandoned." I rely on that treatment.

And the scope of the word al-khalq must be recorded: the word means both "the act of creating" and "the created things"; both parsings are transmitted. In either case the verdict comes out at the same place.


23/18

وَأَنزَلْنَا مِنَ ٱلسَّمَآءِ مَآءًۢ بِقَدَرٍ فَأَسْكَنَّٰهُ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَإِنَّا عَلَىٰ ذَهَابٍۭ بِهِۦ لَقَٰدِرُونَ

wa anzalnā mina'l-samāʾi māʾan bi-qadarin fa-askannāhu fi'l-arḍ, wa innā ʿalā dhahābin bihī la-qādirūn

"We sent down water from the sky by a measure and settled it in the earth. And We are certainly able to take it away."

بِقَدَرٍ — measure

The root ق-د-ر was worked out in detail in al-Qadr, and separately at al-Qamar 54/49 (innā kulla shayʾin khalaqnāhu bi-qadar), and treated again at al-Zumar 39/67 and al-Furqān 25/2. I do not repeat it here. In summary: the most basic sense of the root is to measure, to cut to size, to fix the amount of a thing.

Exactly this connection was made in al-Qadr: the verse "We created everything according to a measure (bi-qadar) (al-Qamar 54/49)" was adduced as the proof of the sense "measure" for the word qadr. I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is this, and it is worth recording: al-Qamar 54/49 sets the measure as a general ruling for everything; this verse applies the same measure to a single phenomenon, rain.

PlaceScope
al-Qamar 54/49kulla shayʾineverything
al-Muʾminūn 23/18māʾanwater

And the particle must be recorded: bi-qadar — "with a measure". The bāʾ here reports accompaniment or instrument; the water comes down together with its measure.

فَأَسْكَنَّٰهُ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ — and a comparison with al-Zumar 39/21

The root س-ك-ن: the ceasing of motion, settling in a place. Sukūn — stillness; sakīna — inward stillness; maskan — the place settled in; sākin — motionless.

The root was treated at al-Furqān 25/45 (wa law shāʾa la-jaʿalahū sākinā — of the shadow) and at al-Rūm 30/21 (li-taskunū ilayhā).

And the same phenomenon — the water that comes down passing into the ground — was told with a different verb at al-Zumar 39/21. The two verses must be set side by side:

al-Zumar 39/21al-Muʾminūn 23/18
The sentenceanzala mina'l-samāʾi māʾan fa-salakahū yanābīʿa fi'l-arḍanzalnā mina'l-samāʾi māʾan … fa-askannāhu fi'l-arḍ
The verbsalakaس-ل-ك: to send into a path, to make pass, to make travelaskanaس-ك-ن: to bring to a stop, to settle
What happens to the waterIt travels — in the form of springsIt stands — it is held in the ground
What followsthumma yukhriju bihī zarʿana crop comes outinnā ʿalā dhahābin bihī la-qādirūnit can be taken away
The emphasisThe process — the working of the cycleThe trust — the water's being held there

The two verbs are the opposite of one another: one to make travel, the other to bring to a stop. This is a contrast that can be verified from the two texts.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the continuing sentences of the two verses: in al-Zumar the movement of the water is told, because the proof there is the crop coming up and then drying — a cycle. In al-Muʾminūn the standing of the water is told, because the proof here is that the water is something held in hand. The same phenomenon, put to two different tasks in two sūras.

And the root salaka will occur in this sūra too: in the twenty-seventh verse, fa'sluk fīhā min kulli zawjayni'thnayn — "put into it two of every kind, a pair". The same root: one sends water into the ground, the other living things into the ship. I give this as an entry about the word and build no connection of meaning between them.

وَإِنَّا عَلَىٰ ذَهَابٍۭ بِهِۦ لَقَٰدِرُونَ

The build of the sentence must be recorded, and I give it as my own reading: the threat one expects would be "We cut off the rain". The verse does not say this: dhahābin bihī"to take it away". It reports, that is, that the water that has come down and settled in the ground can be taken back.

My ground is the object of the verb: the pronoun bihī refers back to the water settled in the ground in the preceding sentence. The threat is aimed not at what will not come but at what is already in hand.

The same line is drawn at al-Mulk 67/30 as well (in aṣbaḥa māʾukum ghawran fa-man yaʾtīkum bi-māʾin maʿīn) — treated in al-Mulk. I rely on that treatment.

And a limit, per the method (Method): on the basis of this verse I build no claim of "foretelling" about underground water tables, aquifer structures or the hydrological cycle. What the verse describes is a phenomenon known by observation: the water that falls does not stay on the surface, it goes down into the ground; wells and springs come out of it; and in drought these recede. The one addressed needed no special knowledge to know this — and the force of the argument comes from exactly that. The same entry was made at al-Mursalāt 77/20-23.


23/19

فَأَنشَأْنَا لَكُم بِهِۦ جَنَّٰتٍ مِّن نَّخِيلٍ وَأَعْنَٰبٍ لَّكُمْ فِيهَا فَوَٰكِهُ كَثِيرَةٌ وَمِنْهَا تَأْكُلُونَ

fa-anshaʾnā lakum bihī jannātin min nakhīlin wa aʿnāb, lakum fīhā fawākihu kathīratun wa minhā taʾkulūn

"With it We brought into being for you gardens of date palms and vines. In them you have many fruits, and from them you eat."

أَنشَأْنَا — the second occurrence of the root

The root was treated at the fourteenth verse. What belongs here is its distribution across the sūra, and this is a fact that can be counted from the text:

VerseSentenceWhat is built
14thumma anshaʾnāhu khalqan ākharThe last step of the human being
19fa-anshaʾnā lakum bihī jannātGardens
31thumma anshaʾnā min baʿdihim qarnan ākharīnA generation
42thumma anshaʾnā min baʿdihim qurūnan ākharīnGenerations
78wa huwa'lladhī anshaʾa lakumu'l-samʿa wa'l-abṣāra wa'l-afʾidaHearing, sight, hearts

All five of the five occurrences report not "bringing into being from nothing" but setting up, standing upright — this is the sense of the root worked out in al-Wāqiʿa. And all five stand in separate blocks of the sūra. I record this as an observation about the structure: the sūra names the human being, the plant, the generations and the organs with the same verb.

نَخِيل وَأَعْنَاب — two plants

Date palms and vines. The two plants are regularly named together in the Qurʾān — al-Baqara 2/266, al-Anʿām 6/99, al-Raʿd 13/4, al-Naḥl 16/11 and 16/67, al-Isrāʾ 17/91, al-Kahf 18/32, Yā-Sīn 36/34.

This pair was treated at Yāsīn 36/34. I rely on that treatment.

And a detail worth recording: both are crops that depend on water in a dry climate, and both can be stored (dried dates, raisins). Two staple products of the daily life of the one addressed are chosen.

فَوَٰكِه — and its distinction from akl

The root ف-ك-ه: to take pleasure, to enjoy. Fākiha — fruit; fukāha — pleasant talk, jesting. The root was treated at al-Wāqiʿa 56/20 and 56/32, and at ʿAbasa 80/31.

And the build of the sentence must be recorded: lakum fīhā fawākihu kathīratun wa minhā taʾkulūn — two separate things are being said.

The lexicographers record this distinction: fākiha is what is eaten for pleasure, not out of necessity; akl is nourishment. The sentence, that is, names first the surplus and then the food itself.

I give this as an observation: the verse counts two needs separately — what feeds and what pleases. The same distinction was recorded in al-Wāqiʿa for the table of the garden.


23/20

وَشَجَرَةً تَخْرُجُ مِن طُورِ سَيْنَآءَ تَنۢبُتُ بِٱلدُّهْنِ وَصِبْغٍ لِّلْءَاكِلِينَ

wa shajaratan takhruju min ṭūri saynāʾa tanbutu bi'l-duhni wa ṣibghin li'l-ākilīn

"And a tree that comes out of Mount Sinai: it brings forth oil, and a relish for those who eat."

The tree is not named

The verse does not give the name of the tree. In the classical exegetical tradition it is widely said to be the olive tree, and two grounds are given for this:

GroundVerse
1al-Nūr 24/35shajaratin mubārakatin zaytūnatin — the blessed tree named for its oil
2al-Tīn 95/1-2wa'l-tīni wa'l-zaytūni · wa ṭūri sīnīn — the olive and Sinai in the same oath

This oath was treated in al-Tīn, where it was recorded that Sinai is the mountain on which Moses received revelation, and that the fig and the olive may stand for a region. I rely on that treatment.

I pass on the explanation that the tree is the olive as it is transmitted; since the verse gives no name, I do not present it as a settled ruling.

طُورِ سَيْنَآء

طُورmountain. The word was treated in al-Ṭūr on the occasion of that sūra's name. I do not repeat it here.

سَيْنَآء — there is a variant reading in the pronunciation of the word: saynāʾ and sīnāʾ. It does not change the meaning; both readings point to the same place.

The lexicographers differ over the origin of the word — whether it is an Arabic adjective (rocky/wooded) or a place name. I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

And an entry on context: the sūra will name Moses twenty-five verses after this one (45). The name Sinai occurs, before the narrative, in a passage about a plant. I record this as an observation and build no claim upon it.

تَنۢبُتُ بِٱلدُّهْنِ — the variant reading, and the work of the bāʾ

This construction is the most disputed place in the verse.

The variant reading:

ReadingPatternMeaning
tanbutuForm I, intransitive"It grows with oil" — the tree grows together with its oil
tunbituForm IV, transitive"It brings forth oil" — the tree produces oil

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

The lexicographers also differ over the work of the bāʾ:

ReadingThe work of the bāʾMeaning
1Attachment / accompaniment (mulābasa / muṣāḥaba)"It grows together with its oil"
2Redundant (required by the parsing, adding no meaning)"It brings forth its oil"
3Transitivising (taʿdiya)"It yields oil"

All three explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. In all three the outcome is close: the tree is a tree whose produce is oil.

صِبْغ — a relish

The root ص-ب-غ: to dye, to dip a thing into a liquid. Ṣibgha — dye, colour (al-Baqara 2/138ṣibghata'llāh).

The lexicographers give the meaning of the word here as follows: the thing bread is dipped into, a relish. The "dipping" sense of the root, that is, is applied to an act at the table.

I record this as an observation about the language: the word names the way olive oil is used at the table — not the produce but the work done with the produce. And the qualification li'l-ākilīn reinforces this: "for those who eat".


23/21-22

وَإِنَّ لَكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَنْعَٰمِ لَعِبْرَةً نُّسْقِيكُم مِّمَّا فِى بُطُونِهَا وَلَكُمْ فِيهَا مَنَٰفِعُ كَثِيرَةٌ وَمِنْهَا تَأْكُلُونَ · وَعَلَيْهَا وَعَلَى ٱلْفُلْكِ تُحْمَلُونَ

wa inna lakum fi'l-anʿāmi la-ʿibrah, nusqīkum mimmā fī buṭūnihā wa lakum fīhā manāfiʿu kathīratun wa minhā taʾkulūn · wa ʿalayhā wa ʿalā'l-fulki tuḥmalūn

"In the grazing animals too there is a lesson for you: We give you to drink of what is in their bellies; in them you have many benefits, and from them you eat. On them and on the ship you are carried."

عِبْرَة — root: ع-ب-ر

The root was worked out at al-Nāziʿāt 79/26 and at al-Ḥashr 59/2 (fa'tabirū yā ulī'l-abṣār). I do not repeat it here. The summary given there:

The concrete sense of the root: to pass from one side of a thing to the other. ʿUbūr — crossing over; maʿbar — a crossing place; ʿibāra — the speech that carries a meaning from one mind to another; taʿbīr — the carrying of a dream from image to meaning; ʿabra — the tear that spills over from the eye.

What belongs here is this, and I give it as my own reading: the picture in the word is passing from one place to another. A "lesson" (ʿibra), that is, is not the watching of what is seen — it is the crossing from what is seen to what is not seen. And the verse shows at once where this crossing runs from and to: from the drink that comes out of the animal's belly, to the order that brings it out.

نُّسْقِيكُم مِّمَّا فِى بُطُونِهَا

The sentence is worth recording: the verse does not say "milk". Mimmā fī buṭūnihā — "of what is in their bellies".

I record this as an observation about the word order: instead of a name, a place is reported. And this fits the logic of the word "lesson" itself: the attention is drawn not to the product but to the place the product comes out of.

The same phenomenon is told in more detail at al-Naḥl 16/66 (min bayni farthin wa damin labanan khāliṣan). This verse keeps it short.

The root س-ق-ي: to give to drink. The pattern is Form IV (asqā), and the lexicographers record a nuance between saqā and asqā: the first is giving a drink once, the second providing a standing source of water. I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted.

مَنَٰفِعُ كَثِيرَة

The root ن-ف-ع: benefit. The word comes in the plural and with an adjective: manāfiʿu kathīra — "many benefits". The verse does not enumerate them.

The same expression occurs at al-Naḥl 16/5 (lakum fīhā difʾun wa manāfiʿu wa minhā taʾkulūn) and at al-Ḥajj 22/33.

وَعَلَيْهَا وَعَلَى ٱلْفُلْكِ تُحْمَلُونَ

فُلْكthe root ف-ل-ك was worked out at al-Zukhruf 43/12. I do not repeat it here. The summary given there: the core the lexicographers give is roundness and turning; falak — an orbit; falka — the round weight at the head of a spindle. Its use for a ship is explained by way of the ship's hull, or of its going by rocking on the water.

And the word order must be recorded: ʿalayhā (on them) and ʿalā'l-fulk (on the ship) are joined by the same particle and by a single verb: tuḥmalūn — "you are carried", passive.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the passive of the verb: the sentence does not say "you ride" — "you are carried." The agent of the verb, that is, is not you. Land and sea are joined in a single verb of carrying.

The same pair was treated at al-Zukhruf 43/12 (wa jaʿala lakum mina'l-fulki wa'l-anʿāmi mā tarkabūn). The difference here must be recorded: in al-Zukhruf the verb is tarkabūn (you ride) — active; here it is tuḥmalūn (you are carried) — passive.

PlaceVerbVoice
al-Zukhruf 43/12tarkabūnyou rideActive — the human being does it
al-Muʾminūn 23/22tuḥmalūnyou are carriedPassive — it is done to the human being

The same phenomenon, in two sūras, in two different voices. And this fits the block as a whole: in everything told since the twelfth verse, the agent of the verb is not the human being.

The close of the block — block II as a whole

Twelve to twenty-two is a single series, and its order is worth recording:

VersesSubjectThe shared aspect
12-16The human being himselfHe had no part in his own forming
17The seven paths above himAnd he has not passed out of being watched over
18Water sent down by measureIt is not held in his hand
19-20PlantsDependent on water
21-22Animals and the shipFood and transport

The direction of the series must be recorded, and I give this as my own reading: it goes from the innermost (the human being's own body) out to the outermost (the heavens) and back in again (what he eats, drinks and rides). And throughout the series the agent of the verbs is one. The same method was treated at al-Wāqiʿa 56/58-72 — there too the seed, the water and the fire were enumerated in turn and at each the question "did you make it?" was put. I rely on that treatment. I record the difference: al-Wāqiʿa asks a question, al-Muʾminūn gives news.


23/23

وَلَقَدْ أَرْسَلْنَا نُوحًا إِلَىٰ قَوْمِهِۦ فَقَالَ يَٰقَوْمِ ٱعْبُدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ مَا لَكُم مِّنْ إِلَٰهٍ غَيْرُهُۥٓ أَفَلَا تَتَّقُونَ

wa laqad arsalnā nūḥan ilā qawmihī fa-qāla yā qawmi'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, a-fa-lā tattaqūn

"We sent Noah to his people, assuredly. He said: 'My people, serve God; you have no god other than Him. Will you not guard yourselves?'"

The pattern of the sequence — how this section is built

How a sequence of prophets is built was treated in detail in al-Ṣāffāt: there each narrative ended with the same seal of three or four sentences (wa taraknā ʿalayhi fi'l-ākhirīn, salāmun ʿalā…, innā kadhālika najzi'l-muḥsinīn). I rely on that treatment.

The sequence of al-Muʾminūn uses a different pattern, and its difference must be recorded:

al-Ṣāffāt 37/75-148al-Muʾminūn 23/23-44
How many prophetsSeven — namedNoah by name; the others unnamed
The repeated elementThe closing seal — peace and praiseThe opening call and the objection of the other side
The emphasisThose deliveredThose who deny
The end of the sequencefa-mattaʿnāhum ilā ḥīn (148)fa-buʿdan li-qawmin lā yuʾminūn (44)

This is a difference that can be verified from the two texts, and I interpret it as my own reading: the al-Ṣāffāt sequence showed the repetition of deliverance; the al-Muʾminūn sequence shows the repetition of the objection. Indeed the same sentence of objection (mā hādhā illā basharun mithlukum) will be repeated for three separate peoples.

يَٰقَوْمِ ٱعْبُدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ مَا لَكُم مِّنْ إِلَٰهٍ غَيْرُهُۥ

The sentence will be repeated word for word in the thirty-second verse — there in the mouth of a messenger who is not named. There is not one word of difference between the two calls.

And the word order must be recorded: mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh — the negation is reinforced with the redundant min. In Arabic, when min enters upon an indefinite noun in a negative sentence it reports istighrāq (none at all, never); the lexicographers record this consistently. Not "you have no other god", that is, but "you have not any other god at all."

أَفَلَا تَتَّقُونَ — "will you not guard yourselves?" The call ends with a question, not with a threat.

And this question will return five times in the sūra, in three different patterns: a-fa-lā tattaqūn (23, 32), a-fa-lā taʿqilūn (80), a-fa-lā tadhakkarūn (85), a-fa-lā tattaqūn (87). All the questions of the sūra are in this pattern.


23/24-25

فَقَالَ ٱلْمَلَؤُا۟ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ مِن قَوْمِهِۦ مَا هَٰذَآ إِلَّا بَشَرٌ مِّثْلُكُمْ يُرِيدُ أَن يَتَفَضَّلَ عَلَيْكُمْ وَلَوْ شَآءَ ٱللَّهُ لَأَنزَلَ مَلَٰٓئِكَةً مَّا سَمِعْنَا بِهَٰذَا فِىٓ ءَابَآئِنَا ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ · إِنْ هُوَ إِلَّا رَجُلٌۢ بِهِۦ جِنَّةٌ فَتَرَبَّصُوا۟ بِهِۦ حَتَّىٰ حِينٍ

fa-qāla'l-malaʾu'lladhīna kafarū min qawmihī mā hādhā illā basharun mithlukum yurīdu an yatafaḍḍala ʿalaykum, wa law shāʾa'llāhu la-anzala malāʾikah, mā samiʿnā bi-hādhā fī ābāʾinā'l-awwalīn · in huwa illā rajulun bihī jinnatun fa-tarabbaṣū bihī ḥattā ḥīn

"The notables of his people who disbelieved said: 'This is nothing but a human being like yourselves; he wants to set himself above you. Had God willed, He would have sent down angels. We never heard of this among our forefathers. He is nothing but a man possessed; wait and watch him for a time.'"

ٱلْمَلَأ — root: م-ل-أ

The concrete sense of the root: to fill. Malaʾa'l-INāʾa — he filled the vessel; milʾ — a fill of something.

And al-malaʾ is described by the lexicographers as follows: the leading men of a community, its notables. Two explanations are transmitted for the naming:

ExplanationGround
1They fill the assembly — those present at the gathering
2They fill the eye — by their bearing

Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And the distribution of the word across the sūra must be recorded: al-malaʾ occurs at 24 among Noah's people, at 33 among the next people, at 46 alongside Pharaoh. Three peoples, the same class.

I record this as an observation: each time it is not the common people but the leading men who voice the objection. This can be verified from the text in all three verses.

مَا هَٰذَآ إِلَّا بَشَرٌ مِّثْلُكُمْ — and its link with al-Furqān 25/7

This objection was treated in detail at al-Furqān 25/7. The sentence there was: mā li-hādhā'l-rasūli yaʾkulu'l-ṭaʿāma wa yamshī fi'l-aswāq. And this was recorded there:

The logic of the objection must be recorded: the one who is a messenger ought to be free of human needs. What is expected is that the messenger should possess a visible privilege.

I rely on that treatment. What belongs here is the comparison of the two sentences:

al-Furqān 25/7al-Muʾminūn 23/24
The pointinghādhā'l-rasūlhādhāno name, only the pointing
What is counted a defectyaʾkulu'l-ṭaʿāma wa yamshī fi'l-aswāqeating and walkingbasharun mithlukumsharing the kind
The alternative demandedlaw lā unzila ilayhi malakunlaw shāʾa'llāhu la-anzala malāʾikah
Additional groundmā samiʿnā bi-hādhā fī ābāʾinā'l-awwalīnthe forefathers
The second move25/8the demand for wealth23/25the charge of madness

The two objections come out of the same place, and this can be verified from the two texts: in both the sending down of an angel is demanded, and in both the messenger's humanity is counted a defect.

And at al-Furqān 25/20 the answer given to this objection was treated: wa mā arsalnā qablaka mina'l-mursalīna illā innahum la-yaʾkulūna'l-ṭaʿāma wa yamshūna fi'l-aswāqthe objection is not rejected, it is generalised.

The answer of al-Muʾminūn lies elsewhere, and it is one of the most striking structural elements of this sūra: the fifty-first verse. There, addressing all the messengers, it will be said kulū mina'l-ṭayyibāti wa'ʿmalū ṣāliḥā"eat of the good things and do righteous deeds". The very act that was the subject of the objection (eating), that is, becomes the content of a command. This will be treated separately at the fifty-first verse.

يُرِيدُ أَن يَتَفَضَّلَ عَلَيْكُمْ

The root ف-ض-ل: to increase, to be in excess, to be superior. Faḍl — surplus, bounty; tafaḍḍulto claim superiority, to strive to stand above (Form V, reflexive).

And the form of the accusation is worth recording: the claim is aimed not at what the messenger says but at his intention. Yurīdu — "he wants".

I give this as my own reading, its ground being that this is the verb used: the other side is not disputing the content of the call; it is describing the purpose behind the call. The same point was recorded at al-Furqān 25/4-8: "not one of the objections looks at what the text says." I rely on that treatment.

And the meaning of Form V must be recorded: the pattern tafaḍḍul reports that superiority is being sought by one's own effort. The charge, that is, is not "superior" but "trying to make himself superior".

مَّا سَمِعْنَا بِهَٰذَا فِىٓ ءَابَآئِنَا ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ

The argument from the forefathers. And this expression will be turned about in the sixty-eighth verse of the sūra:

VerseWho says itSentence
24Noah's peoplemā samiʿnā bi-hādhā fī ābāʾinā'l-awwalīn — "we did not hear of it among our forefathers"
68The textam jāʾahum mā lam yaʾti ābāʾahumu'l-awwalīn — "or has something come to them that did not come to their forefathers?"

The same construction (ābāʾ + al-awwalīn), once as a ground and once as a question. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading: the other side counted novelty a defect; the sixty-eighth verse takes the same point and asks "has anything new come, then?" The assumption the objection rests on — that this had not been heard before — is thereby put in question.

بِهِۦ جِنَّةٌ

The root ج-ن-ن: to cover, to conceal. Janna — a garden (the trees cover the ground); jinn — the unseen; janīn — the one covered in the womb; junna — a shield; junūn — the covering over of the mind. The root was treated in al-Qamar and in al-Jinn. I do not repeat it here.

And this charge will occur once more in the sūra, in the seventieth verse:

VerseOf whomSentence
25Noahin huwa illā rajulun bihī jinnatun
70The Prophet addressedam yaqūlūna bihī jinnatun

The very same construction (bihī jinna), in two different ages. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation: the sūra answers the charge levelled at those it addresses by showing that it was levelled at Noah as well. The same method was recorded at al-Furqān 25/31 and at Fāṭir 35/4: the situation is not removed, it is set in a series.

فَتَرَبَّصُوا۟ بِهِۦ حَتَّىٰ حِينٍ

The root ر-ب-ص: to wait, to watch, to keep a lookout for something to happen. Tarabbuṣ — Form V: to wait and watch.

And the expression will occur once more in the sūra — but on the other side:

VerseWho says itSentenceOf whom
25Noah's peoplefa-tarabbaṣū bihī ḥattā ḥīnWaiting for Noah
54The textfa-dharhum fī ghamratihim ḥattā ḥīnLeaving them be

The same two words (ḥattā ḥīn), in two different mouths. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the exact sameness of the expression: the other side says "wait a while, it will pass"; the fifty-fourth verse sets the same span for them. In neither sentence is the length of the span statedḥīn is an indefinite stretch of time.


23/26

قَالَ رَبِّ ٱنصُرْنِى بِمَا كَذَّبُونِ

qāla rabbi'nṣurnī bimā kadhdhabūn

"He said: 'My Lord, help me, for they have denied me.'"

The brevity of the prayer

The sentence is three words, and it will be repeated word for word in the thirty-ninth verse of the sūra — there in the mouth of a messenger who is not named.

The word order must be recorded: bimā kadhdhabūn — the bāʾ here reports cause ("because they denied me"). Another parsing is also transmitted: is counted maṣdariyya and the sense given is "in return for their denial". Both parsings come out at the same place.

And the addressee of the complaint must be recorded: the prayer is directed to the Lord, not to the people. The same point was treated at al-Furqān 25/30 (inna qawmi'ttakhadhū hādhā'l-qurʾāna mahjūrā), and it was recorded there: while the objections are voiced openly, the answer is directed upward as a complaint. I rely on that treatment.

One further entry: the prayer does not say "destroy them." Unṣurnī — "help me". What is being asked for is not specified. I give this as an observation about the word order.


23/27

فَأَوْحَيْنَآ إِلَيْهِ أَنِ ٱصْنَعِ ٱلْفُلْكَ بِأَعْيُنِنَا وَوَحْيِنَا فَإِذَا جَآءَ أَمْرُنَا وَفَارَ ٱلتَّنُّورُ فَٱسْلُكْ فِيهَا مِن كُلٍّ زَوْجَيْنِ ٱثْنَيْنِ وَأَهْلَكَ إِلَّا مَن سَبَقَ عَلَيْهِ ٱلْقَوْلُ مِنْهُمْ وَلَا تُخَٰطِبْنِى فِى ٱلَّذِينَ ظَلَمُوٓا۟ إِنَّهُم مُّغْرَقُونَ

fa-awḥaynā ilayhi ani'ṣnaʿi'l-fulka bi-aʿyuninā wa waḥyinā, fa-idhā jāʾa amrunā wa fāra'l-tannūru fa'sluk fīhā min kullin zawjayni'thnayni wa ahlaka illā man sabaqa ʿalayhi'l-qawlu minhum, wa lā tukhāṭibnī fi'lladhīna ẓalamū, innahum mughraqūn

"We revealed to him: 'Build the ship under Our eyes and by Our revelation. When Our command comes and the oven boils over, put into it two of every kind, and your family — except those of them against whom the word has already gone forth. And do not address Me concerning those who have done wrong; they are to be drowned.'"

بِأَعْيُنِنَا — "under Our eyes"

The construction was treated at al-Qamar 54/14 (tajrī bi-aʿyuninā) and occurred at al-Ṭūr 52/48 (fa-innaka bi-aʿyuninā). I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is the difference between the two verses, and it must be recorded:

PlaceSentenceWhat bi-aʿyuninā attaches to
al-Qamar 54/14tajrī bi-aʿyunināThe ship's running — while it is on the water
al-Muʾminūn 23/27iṣnaʿi'l-fulka bi-aʿyunināThe ship's making — while it is being built

The same construction, once for the voyage and once for the building. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.

And bi-aʿyuninā + wa waḥyinā must be recorded together: two things are given at once — oversight and instruction. The ship, that is, is built both under watch and by description. I give this as an observation about the word order.

An entry, per the method (Method): no modality is produced about the construction aʿyun (eyes). The lexicographers and the exegetes generally explain the construction as watching over and protection; I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted and go no further.

وَفَارَ ٱلتَّنُّورُ

The root ف-و-ر: to boil, to gush, to overflow. Fāra'l-qidr — the pot boiled; fawr — at once, the moment it comes to the boil (min fawrihim — Āl ʿImrān 3/125).

تَنُّورan oven, a baking pit. The word was cited in this connection in al-Mulk (Hūd 11/40wa fāra'l-tannūr). The word occurs in only two places in the Qurʾān: Hūd 11/40 and this verse.

The exegetes differ over what the expression "the oven boiled over" reports:

ReadingExplanation
1An oven in the literal sense — the gushing of the water began there; a sign
2The earth — the word is used figuratively for every part of the earth
3A particular place — place names are transmitted
4An idiom — an expression like "things came to the boil"

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference. And I do not repeat the place names that are transmitted, since I am not certain of their source. Per the method (Method), I do not add to the narrative a detail the Qurʾān does not give.

فَٱسْلُكْ فِيهَا مِن كُلٍّ زَوْجَيْنِ ٱثْنَيْنِ

The root س-ل-ك was cited at the eighteenth verse: to send into a path, to make pass. The same root is used there for making water pass into the ground, here for putting living things into the ship.

A variant reading must be recorded: the readings min kullin zawjayni'thnayn (with tanwīn) and min kulli zawjayni'thnayn (as a genitive construction) are transmitted.

ReadingMeaning
min kullin zawjayni'thnayn"Of everything, two of a pair"
min kulli zawjayni'thnayn"Of every pair, two"

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The outcome is close in both.

The word زَوْج must be recorded: in Arabic zawj is one member of a pair — not both together, as English "pair" is. For this reason the construction zawjayni'thnayn means "two spouses, that is, two of them". The lexicographers record this nicety consistently.

وَأَهْلَكَ إِلَّا مَن سَبَقَ عَلَيْهِ ٱلْقَوْلُ مِنْهُمْ

The exception must be recorded: part of the family is left outside. And the ground for being left outside is not a kinship but a word that has already gone forth: sabaqa ʿalayhi'l-qawl.

I record this as an observation: in the language of the verse, deliverance is settled not by lineage but by a decree. Who is meant is not said here; at Hūd 11/42-46 a son is spoken of. This verse itself gives no name, and I add none.

وَلَا تُخَٰطِبْنِى فِى ٱلَّذِينَ ظَلَمُوا۟

The root خ-ط-ب: to speak, to address. Khiṭāb — speech exchanged; khuṭba — an address; khiṭba — a proposal of marriage (the giving of one's word).

The scope of the prohibition is worth recording: lā tukhāṭibnī"do not address Me", that is, do not raise the matter. The verse does not say "do not pray" or "do not ask"; it forbids the addressing itself.

I give this as an observation about the word order and go no further.


23/28-29

فَإِذَا ٱسْتَوَيْتَ أَنتَ وَمَن مَّعَكَ عَلَى ٱلْفُلْكِ فَقُلِ ٱلْحَمْدُ لِلَّهِ ٱلَّذِى نَجَّىٰنَا مِنَ ٱلْقَوْمِ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ · وَقُل رَّبِّ أَنزِلْنِى مُنزَلًا مُّبَارَكًا وَأَنتَ خَيْرُ ٱلْمُنزِلِينَ

fa-idhā'stawayta anta wa man maʿaka ʿalā'l-fulki fa-quli'l-ḥamdu li'llāhi'lladhī najjānā mina'l-qawmi'l-ẓālimīn · wa qul rabbi anzilnī munzalan mubārakan wa anta khayru'l-munzilīn

"When you and those with you are settled on the ship, say: 'Praise belongs to God, who delivered us from the wrongdoing people.' And say: 'My Lord, bring me down at a blessed landing; You are the best of those who bring down.'"

Two prayers, two directions

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the two verses: one looks backward, the other forward.

VersePrayerDirection
28al-ḥamdu li'llāhi'lladhī najjānā — perfectWhat is left behind — the deliverance
29rabbi anzilnī munzalan mubārakā — imperativeWhat lies ahead — the arrival

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the tense of the two verbs: at the moment of boarding, something is said both about the place departed from and about the place still to be reached. And both prayers are commanded in the middle of the voyage, when nothing has yet ended.

And an entry on context: the second prayer is for the landing. The ship has not yet moved; but the prayer already speaks of coming down.

مُنزَلًا — the variant reading and the parsing

There is a variant reading in the pronunciation of the word, and it bears on the meaning:

ReadingPatternMeaning
munzalanFrom Form IV, a passive participle or a mīmī verbal noun"The place of being brought down" or "the act of being brought down"
manzilanFrom Form I, a noun of place"A lodging, a place to alight"

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. On both, the prayer asks for the same thing: that the place reached be blessed.

مُّبَارَكًاthe root ب-ر-ك was cited at the fourteenth verse; it was worked out at al-Mulk 67/1. I do not repeat it here.

And the construction is worth recording: what is asked for is not a large, a spacious or a safe place — but a blessed one. The core of the root is lasting and increase. The prayer, that is, asks not for the quality of the place but for the continuance of what will happen there. I give this as my own reading.

وَأَنتَ خَيْرُ ٱلْمُنزِلِينthe second of the five superlative constructions in the sūra (14, 29, 72, 109, 118). And the word order must be recorded: the construction is inside the prayer, not a separate sentence. The one who asks, that is, names the source of what he asks for even as he asks.


23/30

إِنَّ فِى ذَٰلِكَ لَءَايَٰتٍ وَإِن كُنَّا لَمُبْتَلِينَ

inna fī dhālika la-āyātin wa in kunnā la-mubtalīn

"In this there are surely signs. And We were surely putting to the test."

لَءَايَٰتٍ — the plural

The word order must be recorded: āyāt is plural. In the Qurʾān this pattern most often comes in the singular (inna fī dhālika la-āyatan). Here it comes in the plural.

I record this as an observation: the narrative told is not a single event — the call, the objection, the ship, the deliverance, the drowning. The plural fits the number of steps in the narrative.

وَإِن كُنَّا لَمُبْتَلِينَ

The lexicographers dwell on the word order: in here is the lightened form of the heavy inna (mukhaffafa mina'l-thaqīla), and the lām is the distinguishing lām that marks it off. The sentence, that is, is not a negation but an emphatic assertion: "We were surely putting to the test."

The root ب-ل-و / ب-ل-ي: to try, to test; and to wear out, to wear down. Ibtilāʾ — testing. The root was treated at al-Mulk 67/2 (li-yabluwakum ayyukum aḥsanu ʿamalā) and at al-ʿAnkabūt 29/2-3. I do not repeat it here.

And the place of the sentence must be recorded: at the close of the narrative comes the word testing. What is told, that is, is sealed not as a report of destruction but as an instance of a testing.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being this position of the sentence. And the same frame was treated at al-Furqān 25/20 (wa jaʿalnā baʿḍakum li-baʿḍin fitnatan a-taṣbirūn) — where it was recorded that the testing comes by the hand of other people. I rely on that treatment.


23/31-32

ثُمَّ أَنشَأْنَا مِنۢ بَعْدِهِمْ قَرْنًا ءَاخَرِينَ · فَأَرْسَلْنَا فِيهِمْ رَسُولًا مِّنْهُمْ أَنِ ٱعْبُدُوا۟ ٱللَّهَ مَا لَكُم مِّنْ إِلَٰهٍ غَيْرُهُۥٓ أَفَلَا تَتَّقُونَ

thumma anshaʾnā min baʿdihim qarnan ākharīn · fa-arsalnā fīhim rasūlan minhum ani'budū'llāha mā lakum min ilāhin ghayruh, a-fa-lā tattaqūn

"Then after them We brought into being another generation. And We sent among them a messenger from among themselves: 'Serve God; you have no god other than Him. Will you not guard yourselves?'"

قَرْن — root: ق-ر-ن

The concrete sense of the root: to bring two things together, to join them. Qarana — he joined; qarīn — companion, consort; qurūn — horns (the two that stand side by side on the head).

And qarn is recorded by the lexicographers in two senses:

SenseExplanation
1A community living at the same time — from their being together
2A stretch of time — the spans transmitted differ (forty, sixty, a hundred years)

I do not repeat the figures given for the span, since I am not certain of their sources. The usage here is in the first sense — indeed ākharīn (a plural adjective) comes for a community.

A detail of word order must be recorded: qarnan is singular, its adjective ākharīn plural. The lexicographers record this and explain it by qarn being plural in sense (a community).

The people is not named

And this is a fact that must be recorded: the sūra does not say the name of this people. Noah was named; from here on the sequence runs without names.

The exegetes differ over who this people is:

ViewGround
1ʿĀd — it is transmitted that they came immediately after Noah
2Thamūd — the punishment of the ṣayḥa (the cry) in the forty-first verse is named for Thamūd as well
3It has been left indefinite — the withholding of the name is deliberate

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference. And the third view has a ground in the text, which I record: the forty-second verse says qurūnan ākharīn (plural), carrying the sequence on with an unspecified number of peoples. The sūra, that is, is telling not individual peoples but a repeating pattern.

أَنشَأْنَا — the third and fourth occurrences of the root

It was tabulated at the nineteenth verse. What belongs here is the one-word difference between the thirty-first verse and the forty-second:

VerseSentenceThe difference
31thumma anshaʾnā min baʿdihim qarnan ākharīnSingular — one generation
42thumma anshaʾnā min baʿdihim qurūnan ākharīnPlural — generations

The rest of the sentences is word for word the same. This is a fact that can be verified from the text.

I record this as my own reading: the sequence is first set out in detail with one people (31-41), and then shortened by being put in the plural (42-44). The telling, that is, moves from the example to the rule.

رَسُولًا مِّنْهُمْ

The qualification must be recorded: minhum — "from among themselves". The messenger does not come from outside. And this is exactly the point on which the objection in the twenty-fourth verse rests (basharun mithlukum).

The text, that is, itself sets down as a qualification the very matter the objection is about. I give this as an observation. The same line was treated at al-Aḥqāf 46/9 (mā kuntu bidʿan mina'l-rusul).

And the sentence of the call is word for word the same as the twenty-third verse — the only difference being that Noah's vocative yā qawmi is absent here.


23/33-34

وَقَالَ ٱلْمَلَأُ مِن قَوْمِهِ ٱلَّذِينَ كَفَرُوا۟ وَكَذَّبُوا۟ بِلِقَآءِ ٱلْءَاخِرَةِ وَأَتْرَفْنَٰهُمْ فِى ٱلْحَيَوٰةِ ٱلدُّنْيَا مَا هَٰذَآ إِلَّا بَشَرٌ مِّثْلُكُمْ يَأْكُلُ مِمَّا تَأْكُلُونَ مِنْهُ وَيَشْرَبُ مِمَّا تَشْرَبُونَ · وَلَئِنْ أَطَعْتُم بَشَرًا مِّثْلَكُمْ إِنَّكُمْ إِذًا لَّخَٰسِرُونَ

wa qāla'l-malaʾu min qawmihi'lladhīna kafarū wa kadhdhabū bi-liqāʾi'l-ākhirati wa atrafnāhum fi'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyā mā hādhā illā basharun mithlukum yaʾkulu mimmā taʾkulūna minhu wa yashrabu mimmā tashrabūn · wa la-in aṭaʿtum basharan mithlakum innakum idhan la-khāsirūn

"The notables of his people who disbelieved, who denied the meeting of the hereafter, and on whom We had bestowed prosperity in the life of this world, said: 'This is nothing but a human being like yourselves: he eats of what you eat and drinks of what you drink. If you obey a human being like yourselves, then you will surely be the losers.'"

The three conditions of the objection — how the sentence is built

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the verse: the speaking party is introduced by three qualifications:

QualificationExpressionWhat it reports
1kafarūDisbelief
2kadhdhabū bi-liqāʾi'l-ākhiraDenying the hereafter
3atrafnāhum fi'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyāHaving been given prosperity

The third stands apart from the others, and this is a fact that must be recorded: the agent of the first two qualifications is they themselves (kafarū, kadhdhabū); the agent of the third is the textatrafnāhum, "We gave them prosperity".

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this change of voice in the verb: in describing the condition of the objectors, what they themselves did and what was done to them are set side by side. And prosperity is counted not as a crime but as an attribute.

The root ت-ر-ف: to live in abundance, to grow giddy with plenty. Tarafa — he lived in abundance; mutraf — spoiled by prosperity. The root was treated at Sabaʾ 34/34 and at al-Wāqiʿa 56/45 (innahum kānū qabla dhālika mutrafīn). I do not repeat it here.

And the root will come back once more in the sūra: in the sixty-fourth verse, ḥattā idhā akhadhnā mutrafīhim bi'l-ʿadhāb.

VerseSentenceDirection
33wa atrafnāhum fi'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyāIt is given
64akhadhnā mutrafīhim bi'l-ʿadhābIt is taken

The same root, once in the giving and once in the taking. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

يَأْكُلُ مِمَّا تَأْكُلُونَ مِنْهُ وَيَشْرَبُ مِمَّا تَشْرَبُونَ

The objection goes one step further than the one in the twenty-fourth verse, and this must be recorded:

VerseObjectionHow concrete
24basharun mithlukum + yurīdu an yatafaḍḍalaSharing the kind, and intention
33basharun mithlukum + yaʾkulu … wa yashrabTwo everyday acts
47a-nuʾminu li-basharayni mithlinā + wa qawmuhumā lanā ʿābidūnSocial standing

Three objections, three separate peoples, the same core: basharun mithlukum. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

And the two verbs of the thirty-third verse — eating and drinking — are in exactly the same field as the objection at al-Furqān 25/7 (yaʾkulu'l-ṭaʿām). I rely on that treatment.

And the answer to this objection will come in the fifty-first verse: yā ayyuha'l-rusulu kulū mina'l-ṭayyibāt. The act of eating, that is, having been the subject of the objection, becomes the subject of a command. This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be treated separately at the fifty-first verse.

وَلَئِنْ أَطَعْتُم بَشَرًا مِّثْلَكُمْ إِنَّكُمْ إِذًا لَّخَٰسِرُونَ

The word order must be recorded: the sentence begins with the lām of the oath (la-in), and its apodosis is reinforced with innakum … la-khāsirūn. The other side, that is, speaks in the pattern of an oath.

The root خ-س-ر: to diminish, to lose; to give short measure. The root was treated at al-ʿAṣr 103/2 (inna'l-insāna la-fī khusr) and in al-Muṭaffifīn. I do not repeat it here.

And the fate of the word must be recorded: the same root will return in the hundred and third verse of the sūra — ulāʾika'lladhīna khasirū anfusahum. The other side says that those who obey will come to loss; the sūra takes the word and turns it back on them. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation.


23/35-38

أَيَعِدُكُمْ أَنَّكُمْ إِذَا مِتُّمْ وَكُنتُمْ تُرَابًا وَعِظَٰمًا أَنَّكُم مُّخْرَجُونَ · هَيْهَاتَ هَيْهَاتَ لِمَا تُوعَدُونَ · إِنْ هِىَ إِلَّا حَيَاتُنَا ٱلدُّنْيَا نَمُوتُ وَنَحْيَا وَمَا نَحْنُ بِمَبْعُوثِينَ · إِنْ هُوَ إِلَّا رَجُلٌ ٱفْتَرَىٰ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ كَذِبًا وَمَا نَحْنُ لَهُۥ بِمُؤْمِنِينَ

a-yaʿidukum annakum idhā mittum wa kuntum turāban wa ʿiẓāman annakum mukhrajūn · hayhāta hayhāta limā tūʿadūn · in hiya illā ḥayātuna'l-dunyā namūtu wa naḥyā wa mā naḥnu bi-mabʿūthīn · in huwa illā rajulun'ftarā ʿalā'llāhi kadhiban wa mā naḥnu lahū bi-muʾminīn

"'Does he promise you that when you have died and become dust and bones you will be brought out? Far, far off is what you are promised! There is no life but our life in this world: we die and we live, and we are not to be raised. He is nothing but a man who has invented a lie against God, and we are not going to believe him.'"

هَيْهَاتَ — a noun of verbal force

The word is not a noun but an ism fiʿl — a word that carries the meaning of a verb but is not inflected like a verb. Its meaning: "how far off!"

A variant reading is transmitted in the vowel at the end of the word (hayhāta / hayhāti / hayhātu); it does not change the meaning.

And the word order must be recorded: the word is repeated twice. In Arabic such repetition reports emphasis. What is rejected, that is, is counted not far but "very far".

I record this as an observation: the other side does not say that the resurrection is impossible — it says that it is far off. And the particle lām (limā tūʿadūn) must be recorded: the lexicographers record that limā here does not mean "for", but shows to whom the distance belongs.

نَمُوتُ وَنَحْيَا

The lexicographers differ over the sentence, and the disagreement changes the meaning:

ReadingMeaningGround
1"Some of us die, some of us live" — the continuing of the generationsThe next sentence rejecting the resurrection
2"We die and (after us, in our children) we live"The same
3"We live and we die" — the wāw does not report orderThe wāw in Arabic reporting simple conjunction

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference. What is common to all three is this: the sentence confines life to this world.

And the same objection will return word for word in the eighty-second verse of the sūra: a-idhā mitnā wa kunnā turāban wa ʿiẓāman a-innā la-mabʿūthūn. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and the eighty-first verse will name it openly: bal qālū mithla mā qāla'l-awwalūn"they said the same as those before them said."

The sūra, that is, repeats in the eighty-second verse, in the mouths of those it addresses, the sentence it placed in the mouth of a people in the thirty-fifth, and it records this as a finding. This weave can be verified from the wording of the two verses.

ٱفْتَرَىٰ عَلَى ٱللَّهِ كَذِبًا

The root ف-ر-ي: to split, to cut a hide; and to invent. Iftirāʾ — Form VIII: to invent, to fasten upon someone. The root was treated at al-Furqān 25/4 (in hādhā illā ifkun'ftarāh).

And its difference from the counterpart charge in al-Furqān must be recorded:

PlaceChargeWhat it looks at
al-Furqān 25/4ifkun'ftarāhu wa aʿānahū ʿalayhi qawmun ākharūnHe had help — the source
al-Muʾminūn 23/38rajulun'ftarā ʿalā'llāhi kadhibanHe ascribed it to God — the fastening

Two charges from the same root, in two different directions.


23/39-41

قَالَ رَبِّ ٱنصُرْنِى بِمَا كَذَّبُونِ · قَالَ عَمَّا قَلِيلٍ لَّيُصْبِحُنَّ نَٰدِمِينَ · فَأَخَذَتْهُمُ ٱلصَّيْحَةُ بِٱلْحَقِّ فَجَعَلْنَٰهُمْ غُثَآءً فَبُعْدًا لِّلْقَوْمِ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ

qāla rabbi'nṣurnī bimā kadhdhabūn · qāla ʿammā qalīlin la-yuṣbiḥunna nādimīn · fa-akhadhathumu'l-ṣayḥatu bi'l-ḥaqqi fa-jaʿalnāhum ghuthāʾan, fa-buʿdan li'l-qawmi'l-ẓālimīn

"He said: 'My Lord, help me, for they have denied me.' He said: 'In a little while they will be full of regret.' Then the cry seized them in truth, and We made them scum. Away with the wrongdoing people!"

رَبِّ ٱنصُرْنِى بِمَا كَذَّبُونِ — a word-for-word repetition

It is the same as the twenty-sixth verse without the difference of a single letter. Two messengers, two peoples, the same prayer. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

And the answer the two prayers receive is different, and this must be recorded:

VersePrayerAnswer
26rabbi'nṣurnī bimā kadhdhabūn27fa-awḥaynā ilayhi ani'ṣnaʿi'l-fulkaa task is given
39rabbi'nṣurnī bimā kadhdhabūn (the same)40ʿammā qalīlin la-yuṣbiḥunna nādimīna piece of news is given

The same prayer, two different responses. I record this as an observation: in the first a preparation is asked of the messenger; in the second nothing is asked of him.

عَمَّا قَلِيلٍ

The construction: ʿan + (redundant) + qalīl. The lexicographers record that the here is redundant and reinforcing. The sense: "after a little while."

نَادِمِين — the root ن-د-م: regret. The lexicographers also record the branch of the root meaning "to come after a thing" (nadīm — a table companion).

And the form of the news is worth recording: what is reported is not the punishment itself but the state of the other sidenādimīn. What is promised, that is, is not a punishment but a regret.

ٱلصَّيْحَة

The root ص-ي-ح: to cry out loudly. Ṣayḥa — a cry, a din. The root was treated at Yāsīn 36/29, 36/49 and 36/53, and in al-Qamar.

بِٱلْحَقِّ — this must be recorded: the seizing is qualified with truth. The punishment, that is, is named not as an arbitrary display of power but as a deserved outcome.

غُثَآء

The root غ-ث-و / غ-ث-ي: the debris a torrent carries down, the frothy refuse that gathers on the water.

The word was worked out at al-Aʿlā 87/5 (fa-jaʿalahū ghuthāʾan aḥwā)and this very verse was cited there as the word's other occurrence. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is the difference between the two verses:

PlaceWhat ghuthāʾ isThe process
al-Aʿlā 87/5Pasture — greening and then dryingA natural cycle — its adjective aḥwā (blackened)
al-Muʾminūn 23/41A peopleA punishment — with no adjective

The same word, once for a plant and once for a community. And at al-Zumar 39/21 and al-Wāqiʿa 56/65 the same idea was given with a different word (ḥuṭām — crumbled fragments).

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the picture in the word: ghuthāʾ is not a thing that has ceased to exist — it is a thing that stands on the water but is not held. The same finding recorded for habāʾ (dust) at al-Furqān 25/23 holds here too: not annihilation, but not remaining in hand.

فَبُعْدًا لِّلْقَوْمِ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ

The pattern: an absolute object with its verb elided. Buʿdan — "(let there be) distance". In Arabic it is a pattern of imprecation.

And the pattern will come once more in the forty-fourth verse, with a difference of one word:

VerseSentenceOf whom
41fa-buʿdan li'l-qawmi'l-ẓālimīnThe wrongdoers — definite, that people
44fa-buʿdan li-qawmin lā yuʾminūnA people who do not believe — indefinite, general

Two differences must be recorded: the first is definite (al-qawm), the second indefinite (qawmin); the first is qualified by wrongdoing, the second by not believing. At the end of the sequence, that is, the verdict passes from a people to an attribute. This is a difference that can be verified from the text, and it is what the principle recorded in Method — that a verdict is attached to an attribute and not to a group — comes to in this sūra.


23/42-44

ثُمَّ أَنشَأْنَا مِنۢ بَعْدِهِمْ قُرُونًا ءَاخَرِينَ · مَا تَسْبِقُ مِنْ أُمَّةٍ أَجَلَهَا وَمَا يَسْتَـْٔخِرُونَ · ثُمَّ أَرْسَلْنَا رُسُلَنَا تَتْرَا كُلَّ مَا جَآءَ أُمَّةً رَّسُولُهَا كَذَّبُوهُ فَأَتْبَعْنَا بَعْضَهُم بَعْضًا وَجَعَلْنَٰهُمْ أَحَادِيثَ فَبُعْدًا لِّقَوْمٍ لَّا يُؤْمِنُونَ

thumma anshaʾnā min baʿdihim qurūnan ākharīn · mā tasbiqu min ummatin ajalahā wa mā yastaʾkhirūn · thumma arsalnā rusulanā tatrā, kullamā jāʾa ummatan rasūluhā kadhdhabūh, fa-atbaʿnā baʿḍahum baʿḍan wa jaʿalnāhum aḥādīth, fa-buʿdan li-qawmin lā yuʾminūn

"Then after them We brought into being other generations. No community outruns its term, nor can they put it back. Then We sent Our messengers one after another. Whenever its messenger came to a community, they denied him. So We made them follow one after another, and We made them tales. Away with a people who do not believe!"

تَتْرَا — root: و-ت-ر

The original of the word is watrā; the initial wāw has turned into a tāʾ — the lexicographers record this change consistently.

The concrete sense of the root: witr — odd, not even. And from this arises the sense of coming one after another.

And the lexicographers' principal entry here is this: tatrā means to come in succession but not adjoining. Muwātara — coming after another, with an interval in between. The word, that is, carries both continuity and interval at once.

I give this as an entry about the language and rely on the lexicographers' description. And the choice of this word in this verse is worth recording: the messengers are named not as an unbroken chain but as a series repeated at intervals.

A variant reading: tatrā (with alif, a diptote) and tatran (with tanwīn). It does not change the meaning.

كُلَّ مَا جَآءَ أُمَّةً رَّسُولُهَا كَذَّبُوهُ

The word order must be recorded: kullamā — "whenever". The conditional particle reports that there is no exception.

And the agreement of the pronoun must be recorded: ummatan is singular, kadhdhabūhu plural. The lexicographers explain this by umma being plural in sense (a community).

وَجَعَلْنَٰهُمْ أَحَادِيثَ

This construction was worked out at Sabaʾ 34/19. I do not repeat it here. A summary of what was recorded there:

The original sense of the root ح-د-ث is "to be new, to come about afterwards". Aḥādīth means the things that go on being told. And the build of the sentence is this: a community is turned into a narration. At the core of the root lies being new; a people's turning into a "ḥadīth" is its losing its actual existence and becoming something reconstituted afresh at each telling.

And the following finding recorded in Sabaʾ attaches directly here: "the measure of a community is, in the end, what is told about it. The verse names this as a punishment."

What belongs here is the difference of setting between the two verses:

Sabaʾ 34/19al-Muʾminūn 23/44
WhoSabaʾ — a single named peopleA sequence of unnamed peoples
The causebāʿid bayna asfārinātheir own requestkadhdhabūhudenying the messenger
The punishment beside itmazzaqnāhum kulla mumazzaqbeing torn apartfa-atbaʿnā baʿḍahum baʿḍanbeing set in a row

The same punishment, in two different frames.

فَأَتْبَعْنَا بَعْضَهُم بَعْضًا

The root ت-ب-ع: to go after, to follow. Form IV (atbaʿa): to make follow after.

And the word order is worth recording: tatrā (the messengers one after another) and atbaʿnā baʿḍahum baʿḍan (the peoples one after another) give the same idea with two different roots.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being that the two expressions stand in the same verse: the verse builds two parallel seriesthe series of messengers arriving and the series of peoples departing. And the two stand side by side in one sentence.

The block as a whole — what block III shows

VersesWhoWhat happened
23-30Noah — by nameThe call, the objection, the ship, the deliverance
31-41An unnamed peopleThe same call, the same objection, the cry
42-43Unnamed generationsThe rule of the appointed term is set down
44All the messengersThe sequence is gathered into one sentence

The narrowing direction of the block must be recorded, and I give this as my own reading: the telling goes from detail to summary — an eight-verse narrative, then an eleven-verse narrative, then a two-verse rule, then a one-verse gathering. And the gathering sentence is attached to an attribute: li-qawmin lā yuʾminūn.


23/45-46

ثُمَّ أَرْسَلْنَا مُوسَىٰ وَأَخَاهُ هَٰرُونَ بِـَٔايَٰتِنَا وَسُلْطَٰنٍ مُّبِينٍ · إِلَىٰ فِرْعَوْنَ وَمَلَإِي۟هِۦ فَٱسْتَكْبَرُوا۟ وَكَانُوا۟ قَوْمًا عَالِينَ

thumma arsalnā mūsā wa akhāhu hārūna bi-āyātinā wa sulṭānin mubīn · ilā firʿawna wa malaʾihī fa'stakbarū wa kānū qawman ʿālīn

"Then We sent Moses and his brother Aaron (Hārūn) with Our signs and a clear warrant: to Pharaoh and his notables. They grew arrogant; they were a people who held themselves high."

وَأَخَاهُ هَٰرُونَ

The word order must be recorded: Aaron is named not by his name first but by the description brotherakhāhu hārūn.

I give this as an observation: in this sūra most of the prophets are unnamed; Aaron's name is given, but a relation is placed in front of it. And this relation will find its counterpart in the language of the objection in the forty-seventh verse: a-nuʾminu li-basharayni mithlināin the dual. The other side addresses the two of them together.

سُلْطَٰنٍ مُّبِين

The root س-ل-ط: to get on top of a thing, to have mastery, to hold power. Sulṭān — it means both power and proof; the lexicographers explain the second sense as "the argument that silences its opponent and prevails".

And āyāt and sulṭān must be recorded together: two separate things are named. The lexicographers explain this in two ways:

ReadingExplanation
1Āyāt are the miracles, and sulṭān is the force of proof they carry — the conjunction is explicative
2They are two separate things: the miracles, and a clear argument

Both explanations are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

وَكَانُوا۟ قَوْمًا عَالِينَ

The root ع-ل-و: to rise, to be above.

And the word order must be recorded: the sentence is built with kānū (a perfect, reporting continuity). The arrogance, that is, is not a reaction that began with the coming of the messengers — it is a state that existed beforehand.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the order of the two verbs: first fa'stakbarū (they grew arrogant — the reaction to the call), then wa kānū qawman ʿālīn (they were already a people who held themselves high — the prior state). After telling the reaction, the sentence lays down the ground of the reaction.

And the root will return twice more in the sūra:

VerseWordWho
46qawman ʿālīnPharaoh's company
91la-ʿalā baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍThe supposed gods — prevailing over one another
116fa-taʿāla'llāhu'l-maliku'l-ḥaqqGod

The same root, with three different subjects. This is a distribution that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation: the verb of rising shifts place across the sūra and is at last attached to a single place.


23/47-49

فَقَالُوٓا۟ أَنُؤْمِنُ لِبَشَرَيْنِ مِثْلِنَا وَقَوْمُهُمَا لَنَا عَٰبِدُونَ · فَكَذَّبُوهُمَا فَكَانُوا۟ مِنَ ٱلْمُهْلَكِينَ · وَلَقَدْ ءَاتَيْنَا مُوسَى ٱلْكِتَٰبَ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَهْتَدُونَ

fa-qālū a-nuʾminu li-basharayni mithlinā wa qawmuhumā lanā ʿābidūn · fa-kadhdhabūhumā fa-kānū mina'l-muhlakīn · wa laqad ātaynā mūsā'l-kitāba laʿallahum yahtadūn

"They said: 'Are we to believe two human beings like ourselves, while their people are servants to us?' They denied them, and became of those destroyed. We gave Moses the Book, assuredly — that they might be guided."

أَنُؤْمِنُ لِبَشَرَيْنِ مِثْلِنَا — the third objection

This is the third basharun mithlukum objection in the sūra, and it is set apart from the earlier ones by one difference: a social ground is added here.

VerseObjectionThe ground added
24mā hādhā illā basharun mithlukumyurīdu an yatafaḍḍala ʿalaykumintention
33mā hādhā illā basharun mithlukumyaʾkulu … wa yashrabeveryday acts
47a-nuʾminu li-basharayni mithlināwa qawmuhumā lanā ʿābidūnstanding

The third is worth recording: here the objection rests not on the kind but on the social order of rank.

And the particle must be recorded: nuʾminu li-basharayn. In Arabic there is a nuance between āmana bi- (to believe in a thing) and āmana li- (to trust someone, to accept his word), and the lexicographers record it. The particle here is lām: what is at issue is accepting the word of two men.

وَقَوْمُهُمَا لَنَا عَٰبِدُونَ

The root ع-ب-د has a particular feature here, and it must be recorded.

The concrete sense of the root is given by the lexicographers as follows: ṭarīqun muʿabbad — a road levelled and made smooth by being trodden. From this comes the sense of submitting, serving.

And the word is used here not for a service directed to God but for one directed to human beings: lanā ʿābidūn. The word, that is, is not confined to the sense of worship; it is used for service and subordination as well. The lexicographers record this.

I record this as an observation about the language: the other side builds its own standing by looking at who serves whom. And this stands in contrast with the description of the muʾminūn in the first verse of the sūra: there identity is settled by a list of attributes, here by a hierarchy. I record this contrast as my own reading.

فَكَذَّبُوهُمَا فَكَانُوا۟ مِنَ ٱلْمُهْلَكِينَ

The brevity of the narrative is worth recording: the narrative of Moses is one of the longest accounts in the Qurʾān; here it ends in three verses, and none of the events is told — no staff, no sea, no exodus.

I give this as an observation, its ground being the block as a whole: the sūra lines up the narratives not in order to tell them but in order to show the repeating pattern. Here too, accordingly, there are only three elements: the sending, the objection, the outcome.

And the verb must be recorded: kānū mina'l-muhlakīn — "they became of those destroyed". A passive participle pattern. Entry into a group is reported, that is — the group formed by the peoples named before.

وَلَقَدْ ءَاتَيْنَا مُوسَى ٱلْكِتَٰبَ لَعَلَّهُمْ يَهْتَدُونَ

The word order must be recorded: the forty-eighth verse had reported the destruction; the forty-ninth turns back and names the giving of the Book.

And the pronoun must be recorded: laʿallahum yahtadūn — who are "they"? The lexicographers differ:

ReadingWho hum are
1The Children of Israel — the community the Book was given to
2Pharaoh's people — but they had been destroyed
3General — everyone the Book addresses

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.


23/50

وَجَعَلْنَا ٱبْنَ مَرْيَمَ وَأُمَّهُۥٓ ءَايَةً وَءَاوَيْنَٰهُمَآ إِلَىٰ رَبْوَةٍ ذَاتِ قَرَارٍ وَمَعِينٍ

wa jaʿalnā'bna maryama wa ummahū āyatan wa āwaynāhumā ilā rabwatin dhāti qarārin wa maʿīn

"We made the son of Mary and his mother a sign, and We gave the two of them shelter on a height with a place to settle and with running water."

ءَايَةً — singular

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the verse: two persons are named (ibna maryama wa ummahū), but āya comes in the singularāyatan, not the plural.

The lexicographers give several explanations for this singular:

ExplanationGround
1The two together are one sign — neither can be thought of apart from the other
2The singular reports the kind; it does not attend to number
3The sign proper is the event of the birth; the two of them are the parties to that single event

I pass the explanations on; I do not impose a preference. The first explanation is the closest to the text, and I record it as an observation, its ground being that the pronoun is dual: the continuation of the sentence has āwaynāhumā (the two of them). The sentence, that is, keeps the duality in number and unites it in the attribute.

وَجَعَلْنَا — the choice of the verb jaʿala

The distinction between jaʿala and khalaqa was recorded at al-Zukhruf 43/3 and cited at the thirteenth verse: jaʿala reports the putting of a thing from one state into another.

I give this as an observation about the word order: the verse speaks not of the creation of the two persons but of what they were made into. The two are set into the condition of a sign.

ءَاوَيْنَٰهُمَآ — root: أ-و-ي

The concrete sense of the root: to take refuge in a place, to be sheltered. Maʾwā — a shelter; īwāʾ — the giving of shelter. The root was treated at al-Najm 53/15 (jannatu'l-maʾwā) and at al-Nāziʿāt 79/39. And the verb īwāʾ occurs regularly in the Qurʾān in the setting of being taken into protection (al-Ḍuḥā 93/6a-lam yajidka yatīman fa-āwā; treated in al-Ḍuḥā).

I record this as an observation: the verb reports not a move but a sheltering.

رَبْوَة

The root ر-ب-و: to increase, to rise, to swell. The root was worked out at al-Baqara 2/275 (ribā) and treated again at al-Rūm 30/39 and at Fuṣṣilat 41/39 (ihtazzat wa rabat). I do not repeat it here.

Rabwa — a high place, a height. The word occurs at al-Baqara 2/265 as well (ka-mathali jannatin bi-rabwatin).

A variant reading: rabwa / rubwa / ribwa. It does not change the meaning.

ذَاتِ قَرَارٍ وَمَعِينٍ — two adjectives

قَرَارthe root ق-ر-ر was treated at the thirteenth verse. And a link within the sūra is built here, and it must be recorded:

VerseConstructionThe place of what
13qarārin makīnThe place where the forming began
50rabwatin dhāti qarārin wa maʿīnThe place taken refuge in

The same word, once the place where the body is formed, once the place where two people are sheltered. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the core sense of the word: qarār is the place where one stops, where one comes to rest. Both verses describe a place of protection — one unseen, the other geographical.

مَعِين — the lexicographers differ over the origin of the word:

ViewRootMeaning
1ع-ي-نWater seen by the eye, running on the surfaceʿayn (a spring, an eye)
2م-ع-نFlowing abundantlymaʿn, to flow

Both views are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. The outcome is the same on both: running, reachable water. The word occurred at al-Wāqiʿa 56/18 (kaʾsin min maʿīn) and at al-Mulk 67/30 (bi-māʾin maʿīn).

And the pairing of the two adjectives is worth recording: qarār reports standing still, maʿīn flowing. The place is fixed, the water runs. I record this as an observation about the language.

The place is not named

The verse does not say where the height is. A few place names are transmitted in the classical commentaries; I do not pass them on, since I am not certain of their sources. Per the method (Method), I do not add to the narrative a detail the Qurʾān does not give.


23/51

يَٰٓأَيُّهَا ٱلرُّسُلُ كُلُوا۟ مِنَ ٱلطَّيِّبَٰتِ وَٱعْمَلُوا۟ صَٰلِحًا إِنِّى بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ عَلِيمٌ

yā ayyuha'l-rusulu kulū mina'l-ṭayyibāti wa'ʿmalū ṣāliḥā, innī bimā taʿmalūna ʿalīm

"Messengers! Eat of the good things and do righteous deeds. I know what you do."

Whom the address is to

The sentence addresses a plural: yā ayyuha'l-rusul — "messengers". And this is the only address in the Qurʾān directed to the messengers collectively.

The exegetes differ over who is addressed:

#ViewGround
1All the messengers — a common command spoken to each in his own timeThe plural address
2A single messenger (the one in the setting) — the plural for honour or for generalisationThe preceding verses naming the messengers one by one
3The communities, by way of the messengers — the address is to the messengers, the ruling is generalThe content of the command applying to everyone

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

The order of the command — eating, then deeds

And this is the most striking place in the verse.

The word order must be recorded: kulū (eat) comes first, wa'ʿmalū ṣāliḥā (do righteous deeds) second.

I record this as my own reading, and its ground is the sūra's own text: in the thirty-third verse the expression the other side used in objecting to the messenger was exactly this — yaʾkulu mimmā taʾkulūna minh. The act of eating was counted a defect there.

Eighteen verses later the same verb becomes the first word of a command directed at all the messengers.

VerseWho says itVerbIts office
33The objectorsyaʾkulu mimmā taʾkulūna minhA defect — the proof that refutes the claim to be a messenger
51The textkulū mina'l-ṭayyibātA command — the order given to the messengers

This is a weave that can be verified within the sūra.

And the same method was treated between al-Furqān 25/7 and 25/20. What was recorded there holds here too:

The answer does not reject the description in the objection — it confirms it and generalises it. Not "it is not so", that is, but "it always was so".

I compare the method of the two sūras:

al-Furqān 25/725/20al-Muʾminūn 23/3323/51
The objectionyaʾkulu'l-ṭaʿāma wa yamshī fi'l-aswāqyaʾkulu mimmā taʾkulūna minh
The mood of the answerReportla-yaʾkulūna'l-ṭaʿām (it always was so)Commandkulū (do it thus)
The distance between13 verses18 verses
Whom the answer addressesThe objectorsThe messengers

The difference is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: al-Furqān meets the objection with a report — "the messengers were always like this". al-Muʾminūn turns the same verb into a command — "eat". One is a defence, then, the other an order.

مِنَ ٱلطَّيِّبَٰت

The root ط-ي-ب: to be pleasant, to be clean, to be good. Ṭayyib — pleasant, clean, lawful. The root was treated at al-Baqara 2/168 and 2/172 (kulū min ṭayyibāti mā razaqnākum).

And there is an overlap that must be recorded: al-Baqara 2/172 directs the same command to those who believe; this verse directs the same command to the messengers.

PlaceAddresseeCommand
al-Baqara 2/172yā ayyuha'lladhīna āmanūkulū min ṭayyibāti mā razaqnākum
al-Muʾminūn 23/51yā ayyuha'l-rusulkulū mina'l-ṭayyibāt

The same command, to two different addressees. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts, and I record it as an observation: on this item no difference is set between the messenger and the believer.

وَٱعْمَلُوا۟ صَٰلِحًا

Ṣāliḥ — root ص-ل-ح: to be unspoiled, to be sound and serviceable. Iṣlāḥ — putting right; ṣulḥ — the repairing of what is broken. The word has occurred in many places across this series.

And the word order must be recorded: ṣāliḥan is indefinite — "a righteous (deed)". Not definite. The command, that is, does not give a list.

إِنِّى بِمَا تَعْمَلُونَ عَلِيمٌ — the close of the sentence is attached to the deed, not to the eating. And bimā taʿmalūna has been brought forward (taqdīm): "what you do — I know."


23/52

وَإِنَّ هَٰذِهِۦٓ أُمَّتُكُمْ أُمَّةً وَٰحِدَةً وَأَنَا۠ رَبُّكُمْ فَٱتَّقُونِ

wa inna hādhihī ummatukum ummatan wāḥidatan wa ana rabbukum fa'ttaqūn

"This community of yours is one single community, and I am your Lord. So guard yourselves against Me."

The variant reading

Three readings are transmitted for the particle at the head of the sentence, and the difference bears on the meaning:

ReadingParsingThe sense of the sentence
wa inna (with kasra, with shadda)It begins a new sentence"And truly this community of yours is one single community"
wa anna (with fatḥa, with shadda)It attaches to an element in the preceding sentence"…and (know) this: your community is one single community"
wa in (without shadda, the lightened form)EmphasisThe sense is close to the first

All three readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. It produces no radical change in the ruling.

أُمَّة — root: أ-م-م

The concrete sense of the root: to turn towards, to aim at; and origin, mother. Amma — he turned towards; imām — the one who goes in front, the one turned towards; umm — mother; umma — a community gathered towards a common direction.

The word was treated at al-Shūrā 42/13 and at al-Baqara 2/213.

And the parsing of the word here must be recorded: ummatan wāḥidatan is in the accusative — the lexicographers count it a circumstantial accusative. The sentence, that is, is closer to "your community — as one single community — is your community" than to "your community is one community". I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted.

فَٱتَّقُونِ — and the form of the same sentence in al-Anbiyāʾ

This sentence occurs once more in the Qurʾān, almost word for word: al-Anbiyāʾ 21/92. The only difference between the two verses is in the last word:

PlaceSentenceLast word
al-Anbiyāʾ 21/92inna hādhihī ummatukum ummatan wāḥidatan wa ana rabbukumfa'ʿbudūn"so serve Me"
al-Muʾminūn 23/52wa inna hādhihī ummatukum ummatan wāḥidatan wa ana rabbukumfa'ttaqūn"so guard yourselves against Me"

This verse was treated at al-Anbiyāʾ 21/92-93; I rely on that treatment. And the following verse of the two sūras overlaps as well — al-Anbiyāʾ 21/93: wa taqaṭṭaʿū amrahum baynahum kullun ilaynā rājiʿūn; al-Muʾminūn 23/53: fa-taqaṭṭaʿū amrahum baynahum zuburā. In both sūras, that is, the sentence of unity is followed by the same sentence of breaking apart. This is an overlap that can be verified from the wording of the two texts.

And the choice of word here has a ground within the sūra, which must be recorded: the question a-fa-lā tattaqūn has occurred twice in this sūra, from the mouths of two messengers (23, 32). The fifty-second verse brings the same root in the imperative. The sūra, that is, repeats the messengers' question as its own verdict.

Where the disagreement comes from — the passage to verse 53

The fifty-second verse reports unity; the fifty-third reports the breaking apart. The passage between them is the very question treated at al-Baqara 2/213 and al-Shūrā 42/13-14.

It was recorded at al-Baqara 2/213:

The cause of the division, that is, is not given as ignorance. The text says it plainly: min baʿdi mā jāʾathumu'l-bayyinātafter the clear proofs had come. The cause is given not as a lack of knowledge but as a disposition held against one another.

At al-Shūrā 42/14 the same ruling was repeated in almost the same words: wa mā tafarraqū illā min baʿdi mā jāʾahumu'l-ʿilmu baghyan baynahum.

I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here. The three sūras build the same order:

PlaceUnityWhat comesOutcome
al-Baqara 2/213kāna'l-nāsu ummatan wāḥidaProphets and a bookikhtalafa fīhibaghyan baynahum
al-Shūrā 42/13-14aqīmū'l-dīna wa lā tatafarraqū fīhal-ʿIlmmā tafarraqū illā min baʿdi…
al-Muʾminūn 23/52-53ummatukum ummatan wāḥidaThe messengers (51)fa-taqaṭṭaʿū amrahum baynahum

In all three the order is the same: unity → knowledge → division. This is an overlap that can be verified from the three texts.

And the difference in al-Muʾminūn must be recorded: al-Baqara and al-Shūrā name the cause of the division (baghy — envious rivalry). al-Muʾminūn gives no cause; in its place it describes the form of the division: zuburan and kullu ḥizbin bimā ladayhim fariḥūn. One tells why, that is, the other how.


23/53

فَتَقَطَّعُوٓا۟ أَمْرَهُم بَيْنَهُمْ زُبُرًا كُلُّ حِزْبٍۭ بِمَا لَدَيْهِمْ فَرِحُونَ

fa-taqaṭṭaʿū amrahum baynahum zuburā, kullu ḥizbin bimā ladayhim fariḥūn

"But they cut their affair apart among themselves into pieces. Every party rejoices in what it has."

فَتَقَطَّعُوا۟ — word order

The root ق-ط-ع: to cut, to sever. The pattern is Form V (taqaṭṭaʿa), and the lexicographers record that this pattern reports two things at once here: takalluf (doing it with their own hands) and muṭāwaʿa (being broken apart).

And the word order must be recorded: the verb is transitive — taqaṭṭaʿū amrahum. What is cut apart, that is, is not they but their affair. They are not being broken apart; they are breaking apart the one affair in their hands.

I give this as an observation about the word order, and its ground is the presence of the object. And the qualification baynahum (among themselves) shows that the breaking apart took the form of a division of shares.

زُبُرًا — root: ز-ب-ر

The root was worked out at al-Qamar 54/43 and 54/52. I do not repeat it here. A summary of what was recorded there:

The root ز-ب-ر: to incise on a hard surface; and a mass of iron, a well lined with stone. Zubur — the plural of zabūr or of zibr: written pages, books. And in al-Qamar the difference between ز-ب-ر and س-ط-ر was tabulated: ز-ب-ر is incising, and it reports permanence — not being erased.

And in al-Qamar it was shown that the root builds a question-and-answer link within that sūra (a question at 54/43, an answer at 54/52). I rely on that treatment.

What belongs here is the meaning of the word in this verse, and the lexicographers differ:

ReadingWhat zubur isIts ground
1Books — each party took a book of its ownThe "written page" branch of the root; and the setting being religion
2Pieces — the plural of zubra; zubratu'l-ḥadīd, a mass or piece of iron (it occurs at al-Kahf 18/96)The verb (taqaṭṭaʿū) reporting a breaking into pieces
3Groups, partieskullu ḥizbin in the continuation of the sentence

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

There is a variant reading as well: the readings zuburan (زُبُرًا — with ḍamma on the bāʾ, the plural of zabūr/zibr) and zubara (زُبَرًا — with fatḥa on the bāʾ, the plural of zubra) are transmitted. This variant reading bears directly on the disagreement above: the fatḥa reading supports the second sense, the ḍamma reading the first.

And the lexicographers differ over its parsing as well: is zuburan a circumstantial accusative (in pieces), or a substitute for amr? Both parsings are transmitted.

I record this much as my own reading, its ground being the analysis of the root in al-Qamar: at the core of the root is incising on a hard surface. Whichever sense is taken, the word reports something that cannot easily be undone — whether an incised text or a broken-off piece of iron. And set beside the verb (taqaṭṭaʿū), the permanence of what has been done comes to the fore. This is a reading, and it is not binding.

كُلُّ حِزْبٍۭ بِمَا لَدَيْهِمْ فَرِحُونَ

The sentence occurs once more in the Qurʾān, in exactly the same wording: al-Rūm 30/32. It was treated at al-Rūm 30/32 (mina'lladhīna farraqū dīnahum wa kānū shiyaʿan, kullu ḥizbin bimā ladayhim fariḥūn). I rely on that treatment.

The two verses can be compared:

al-Rūm 30/32al-Muʾminūn 23/53
The verb before itfarraqū dīnahum — they divided their religiontaqaṭṭaʿū amrahum — they cut apart their affair
The name of the groupskānū shiyaʿan — sectszuburā — pieces / books
The shared sentencekullu ḥizbin bimā ladayhim fariḥūnWord for word the same

The same concluding sentence, after two different verbs. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.

حِزْب — the root ح-ز-ب: to gather together; and a definite portion of a thing. Ḥizb — a band, a party; and a section of a book. The lexicographers also record the branch of the root meaning "distress, hardship" (ḥazabahu'l-amr).

فَرِحُون — and the distinction between ف-ر-ح / م-ر-ح

The distinction between the roots was worked out at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/75. I do not repeat it here. What was given there:

WordRootMeaning
tafraḥūnف-ر-حTo rejoice, to be gladdened
tamraḥūnم-ر-حTo be giddy, to walk with a swagger

And the finding recorded in Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) was this:

Rejoicing is not condemned in itself — rejoicing without warrant is condemned. The second verb, by contrast, comes without qualification, because the word maraḥ already carries excess within it.

I rely on that treatment. And what belongs here is this: in this verse it is not maraḥ but fariḥ that is used — so what is condemned is not joy itself. Indeed at al-Rūm 30/1-5 the same root was used of the believers: wa yawmaʾidhin yafraḥu'l-muʾminūn.

This distinction was tabulated in al-Rūm, where the root's three occurrences (30/4, 30/32, 30/36) were gathered under the heading "joy changing according to what it is attached to". I rely on that treatment.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the qualification in the sentence: what is condemned is not faraḥ but bimā ladayhim fariḥūnrejoicing "in what they have". And the word ladayhim (what is beside them) must be recorded: joy is being measured by what is held in hand. The verse points at the object of the joy.

The verse as a whole

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the order of the two sentences: the verse first tells the breaking apart (taqaṭṭaʿū), then tells that the breaking apart continues (fariḥūn — an active participle, an ongoing state). And the second sentence explains why the first is not being repaired: each party is content with what it has. The breaking apart, that is, is not experienced as a loss.


23/54

فَذَرْهُمْ فِى غَمْرَتِهِمْ حَتَّىٰ حِينٍ

fa-dharhum fī ghamratihim ḥattā ḥīn

"So leave them in their own flood until a time."

غَمْرَة — root: غ-م-ر

The concrete sense of the root: water's covering a thing completely, closing over it and taking it in. Ghamara'l-māʾu — the water covered it; ghamr — abundant water, a deep place; ghimr — rancour (what covers the heart); mughāmara — throwing oneself into a thing.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series.

The picture in the word is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: ghamra is a state one is inside of and from which the outside cannot be seen. The word, that is, names not an error but a being surrounded.

And the word will return once more in the sūra, nine verses later:

VerseSentenceWhere the ghamra is
54fa-dharhum fī ghamratihimThey are inside it
63bal qulūbuhum fī ghamratin min hādhāTheir hearts are inside it

The same word, twice, nine verses apart. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

And the difference must be recorded: in the fifty-fourth verse what is surrounded is the persons; in the sixty-third it is their hearts. The second occurrence, that is, narrows the location of the first.

حَتَّىٰ حِينٍ — and its link with the twenty-fifth verse

These two words occurred in the twenty-fifth verse in the mouth of the other side: fa-tarabbaṣū bihī ḥattā ḥīn — "wait and watch him for a time".

VerseWho says itCommandConcerning whom
25Noah's peoplefa-tarabbaṣū bihīwatchConcerning the messenger
54The textfa-dharhumleaveConcerning them

The same two words, on two different sides. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and I record it as an observation: the command to wait changes direction twenty-nine verses later.

حِينan indefinite stretch of time. The lexicographers record that the word reports no fixed span. In neither verse is the span stated.

فَذَرْهُمْ — the meaning of the verb

The root و-ذ-ر: to leave, to abandon. The lexicographers record that the perfect of this verb is not used — only the imperfect and the imperative are current.

And the scope of the command must be recorded, and I give this as my own reading: the command is not "do not trouble yourself with them" but "leave them inside their own state". The qualification fī ghamratihim shows this: the place they are left in is their own condition.

The same line was treated at al-Furqān 25/43 (a-fa-anta takūnu ʿalayhi wakīlā) and in the limit of responsibility tabulated at al-Qaṣaṣ 28/56. This verse is a link in that line.


23/55-56

أَيَحْسَبُونَ أَنَّمَا نُمِدُّهُم بِهِۦ مِن مَّالٍ وَبَنِينَ · نُسَارِعُ لَهُمْ فِى ٱلْخَيْرَٰتِ بَل لَّا يَشْعُرُونَ

a-yaḥsabūna annamā numidduhum bihī min mālin wa banīn · nusāriʿu lahum fi'l-khayrāt, bal lā yashʿurūn

"Do they suppose that, in the wealth and sons with which We supply them, We are hurrying good things to them? No — they do not perceive."

نُمِدُّهُم — root: م-د-د

The concrete sense of the root: to extend, to draw out, to feed continuously. Madd — extending; midād — ink (what flows steadily to the pen); imdād — supplying without interruption.

The pattern is Form IV, and the lexicographers record a distinction between madda and amadda: amadda is used mostly for good and support, madda for extending a term and granting respite. I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted; there are exceptions to this distinction in the Qurʾān as well.

And the verb's coming in the imperfect must be recorded: numidduhuman ongoing giving.

مَالٍ وَبَنِين

The two words occur together regularly in the Qurʾān: al-Kahf 18/46 (al-mālu wa'l-banūna zīnatu'l-ḥayāti'l-dunyā), Sabaʾ 34/35 (naḥnu aktharu amwālan wa awlādan; treated in Sabaʾ), Nūḥ 71/12 (treated in Nūḥ), al-Qalam 68/14 (treated in al-Qalam).

And the whole of this question was treated at Sabaʾ 34/35-37: the answer given to counting wealth and children a measure of nearness. I rely on that treatment and do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is how the question is built.

How the question is built — two verses forming one sentence

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the two verses: the fifty-fifth and fifty-sixth verses are a single sentence; the verse boundary does not divide the sentence.

The skeleton of the sentence is this: a-yaḥsabūna anna… nusāriʿu lahum fi'l-khayrāt. The question, that is, is not about "We are giving wealth"; it is about the assumption that "to give wealth is to hurry good things to them".

I give this as an observation about the word order, its ground being that the predicate of anna is in the second verse. And the lexicographers differ over the parsing: whether annamā is joined (kāffa) or separate (anna + relative ); both parsings are transmitted. In either case the ruling of the sentence comes out at the same place.

نُسَارِعُ لَهُمْ فِى ٱلْخَيْرَٰت — and its link with the sixty-first verse

And one of the most striking verbal weaves of the sūra is built here.

The root س-ر-ع: to be swift. The pattern is Form III (sāraʿa): to hurry, to hasten as though racing.

The same verb will occur once more, five verses later:

VerseSentenceAgentWhat
56nusāriʿu lahum fi'l-khayrātWe (supposedly)Good things are hurried to themwhat they suppose
61ulāʾika yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrātThey — those described at 57-60They themselves hurry to good things — what is

The same verb, with the same construction (fi'l-khayrāt), twice, five verses apart. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra and is read from the wording of the text.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this word-for-word repetition: in the fifty-sixth verse the one hurrying to the good things is the giver, and the place hurried to is in front of them; in the sixty-first the ones hurrying to the good things are the servants. Five verses after describing a delusion, that is, the sūra shows the right subject of the same expression.

And the difference is precisely a difference of subject: one supposes that something is being hurried to him, the other is himself hurrying.

بَل لَّا يَشْعُرُونَ

The particle bal was treated at al-Furqān 25/11: it drops what has just been said and brings the real cause. I rely on that treatment.

The root ش-ع-ر: to notice something fine, to sense it. Shaʿr — hair (from its fineness); shāʿir — the one who notices what is fine; mashʿar — a place marked and known; shuʿūr — perception.

And the choice of verb must be recorded: the verse does not say lā yaʿlamūn (they do not know) — lā yashʿurūn (they do not perceive). The picture in the root is the noticing of something fine.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being this sense of the root: what is lacking is not knowledge but noticing. They see that wealth and children are being given; they do not perceive what the giving means.

The close of block V

The section from the fifty-first verse to the fifty-sixth is a whole, and its order is worth recording:

VerseWhat
51A command shared by the messengers — eat and do righteous deeds
52The oneness of the community
53The breaking apart, and the contentment of the groups
54Being left — until a time
55-56The misreading of prosperity

I give this as my own reading: the block descends from unity to breaking apart, from breaking apart to contentment, from contentment to delusion. And at every step the other side holds a good opinion: rejoicing in what it has (53), counting prosperity a favour (55-56). What the block describes, that is, is not a punishment but a misreading.


23/57-59

إِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ هُم مِّنْ خَشْيَةِ رَبِّهِم مُّشْفِقُونَ · وَٱلَّذِينَ هُم بِـَٔايَٰتِ رَبِّهِمْ يُؤْمِنُونَ · وَٱلَّذِينَ هُم بِرَبِّهِمْ لَا يُشْرِكُونَ

inna'lladhīna hum min khashyati rabbihim mushfiqūn · wa'lladhīna hum bi-āyāti rabbihim yuʾminūn · wa'lladhīna hum bi-rabbihim lā yushrikūn

"Those who tremble in awe of their Lord; those who believe in the signs of their Lord; those who associate nothing with their Lord…"

The second list of attributes — the return of the pattern

The pattern of the sūra's first eleven verses returns here unchanged: alladhīna hum + fronted complement + predicate.

The two lists must be set out in a table:

The first list (1-11)The second list (57-61)
Openingqad aflaḥa'l-muʾminūnthe verdict firstinna'lladhīna hum…the verdict at the end
Number of itemsSix (2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9)Four (57, 58, 59, 60)
The kind of itemsActs — prayer, speech, property, body, covenantStates — trembling, faith, tawḥīd, the quaking of the heart
Closingulāʾika humu'l-wārithūn (10)ulāʾika yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrāt (61)
The kind of closingA placeal-FirdawsA movementyusāriʿūn, sābiqūn
Shared by every itemhum, the pronoun of separationhum, the pronoun of separation (57, 58, 59 — absent at 60)

I record one difference separately: the sixtieth verse is the one item of the list that does not carry the pronoun humwa'lladhīna yuʾtūna mā ātaw. This is a detail that can be verified from the text, and it will be taken up at the sixtieth verse.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the table above: the first list enumerates the works done, the second what is inside while the works are done. And the first list ends with an arrival (an inheritance), the second with a running (a race). One names the outcome, that is, the other the movement.

مِّنْ خَشْيَةِ رَبِّهِم مُّشْفِقُون — two words

خَشْيَة — root خ-ش-ي: the description the lexicographers give is a holding back that is felt knowingly. Khashya has to do with knowing the greatness of what is feared; thus at Fāṭir 35/28 it is said innamā yakhsha'llāha min ʿibādihi'l-ʿulamāʾ. The root was treated at Fāṭir 35/28 and at al-Mulk 67/12 (yakhshawna rabbahum bi'l-ghayb).

And a note of caution must be entered here: the root of this word (خ-ش-ي) and the root of the word khāshiʿūn in the second verse (خ-ش-ع) are separate roots. Their sounds are close and their senses are neighbours; but I build no derivational link between them.

The same note of caution was entered in ʿAbasa and in al-Muṭaffifīn for roots close to one another in sound: "closeness of sound is not identity of root." I rely on that treatment.

مُشْفِقُون — root ش-ف-ق: the core sense the lexicographers give is thinness. Shafaq — the thin light between day and night; shafaqa — the thinness of a thing. And ishfāq is described by the lexicographers as follows: a fear with love in it, or a love with fear in it. The root was treated at al-Inshiqāq 84/16 (fa-lā uqsimu bi'l-shafaq).

The build of the construction must be recorded: min khashyati rabbihim mushfiqūnthe source of the fear (khashya) and the state that is felt (ishfāq) are named separately.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being that both words have at their core not "shuddering" but "thinness / knowing": the verse is not speaking of terror. Both words are words that describe a sharpening of attention.

وَٱلَّذِينَ هُم بِـَٔايَٰتِ رَبِّهِمْ يُؤْمِنُونَ

And the word order must be recorded: bi-āyāti rabbihim has been brought forward. Not "they believe", that is, but "in the signs of their Lord — they believe".

And a contrast will be built with the sixty-sixth verse: qad kānat āyātī tutlā ʿalaykum fa-kuntum ʿalā aʿqābikum tankiṣūn. The same word (āyāt), with two different bearings.

وَٱلَّذِينَ هُم بِرَبِّهِمْ لَا يُشْرِكُونَ

And the repetition of the word rabb must be recorded: in all four of the four items, rabbihim occurs — khashyati rabbihim, āyāti rabbihim, bi-rabbihim, ilā rabbihim (60).

This is a fact that can be counted from the text, and it has no counterpart in the first list: the word rabb does not occur in a single one of the six items of the first list.

The first listThe second list
The word rabbIt does not occur at allIn all four of the four items
The subject of the itemsActs — prayer, property, bodyA relation — always looking in one direction

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this count: the second list builds its items by attaching them to one addressed. The first list enumerates the acts on their own. The difference between the two lists shows here as well.


23/60

وَٱلَّذِينَ يُؤْتُونَ مَآ ءَاتَوا۟ وَّقُلُوبُهُمْ وَجِلَةٌ أَنَّهُمْ إِلَىٰ رَبِّهِمْ رَٰجِعُونَ

wa'lladhīna yuʾtūna mā ātaw wa qulūbuhum wajilatun annahum ilā rabbihim rājiʿūn

"Those who give what they give with their hearts trembling because they are returning to their Lord…"

The variant reading — it changes the meaning

The variant reading transmitted in this verse bears directly on the meaning:

ReadingVerbMeaning
yuʾtūna mā ātawإيتاء — to give (Form IV)"They give what they give" — spending
yaʾtūna mā atawإتيان — to come / to do (Form I)"They do what they do" — deeds

The second reading is transmitted in the sources, and on that reading the verse describes not spending but deeds in general. Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And what the two readings have in common must be recorded: on both, the real question is not the act itself but the state of the heart that accompanies the act.

وَقُلُوبُهُمْ وَجِلَةٌ — the core of the verse

The root و-ج-ل: to tremble with fear, to shudder. Wajal — the trembling in the heart.

The word occurs regularly in the Qurʾān together with the heart: al-Anfāl 8/2 (wajilat qulūbuhum), al-Ḥijr 15/52 and 15/53, al-Ḥajj 22/35, al-Zumar 39/23 (treated in al-Zumar).

And the striking place in the verse is this, and I record it as my own reading: the sentence describes a fear felt while doing a good work. Not while committing a sin.

My ground is the build of the sentence: yuʾtūna mā ātaw (they give) and qulūbuhum wajila (their hearts tremble) take place at the same time — the second is a circumstantial clause.

And the ground of the fear is given in the verse: annahum ilā rabbihim rājiʿūn"that they are returning to their Lord."

أَنَّهُمْ إِلَىٰ رَبِّهِمْ رَٰجِعُونَ — its parsing

The lexicographers differ over the parsing of the construction, and the difference bears on the meaning:

ReadingWhat stands before anna (understood)Meaning
1li-anna (cause)"Their hearts tremble because they are returning to their Lord"
2min anna / bi-annaClose to the same direction
3The object of the verb wajila"They fear that they are returning to their Lord"

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

The third reading is worth recording, because its outcome differs: on the first reading what is feared is that the deed will not be enough, on the third the return itself.

And the line recorded at Fāṭir 35/28 and al-Mulk 67/12 holds here too: in the Qurʾān khashya is named together with knowledge, wajal with the expectation of a meeting.

The place of this item in the list

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the arrangement of the list: the first three of the four items reported states (trembling, faith, not associating partners). The fourth brings a deed (yuʾtūna) and places a state beside the deed.

The list, that is, in descending from states to a deed, sets the state inside the deed. And this is the reverse of the first list: there the acts were enumerated and their fields fixed; here the states are enumerated and at the end attached to a deed.


23/61

أُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ يُسَٰرِعُونَ فِى ٱلْخَيْرَٰتِ وَهُمْ لَهَا سَٰبِقُونَ

ulāʾika yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrāti wa hum lahā sābiqūn

"Those are the ones who hurry to good things, and it is they who are foremost in them."

يُسَٰرِعُونَ فِى ٱلْخَيْرَٰت — the weave with the fifty-sixth verse

This construction occurred word for word in the fifty-sixth verse and was tabulated there. I do not repeat it here; I recall it briefly: in fifty-six the agent of the verb is the giver, here the servants. The same expression, five verses apart, with two different subjects.

وَهُمْ لَهَا سَٰبِقُونَ — a disagreement over the parsing

The root س-ب-ق: to go before, to be ahead in a race. The root was treated in detail at al-Wāqiʿa 56/10 (wa'l-sābiqūna'l-sābiqūn) — where it was recorded that the word ceases to report an act and turns into the name of a class. I rely on that treatment.

The lexicographers differ over the parsing of the construction here:

ReadingThe work of lahāMeaning
1The complement of sābiqūn"They are the ones who go foremost in hurrying to them (the good things)"
2The lām here carries the sense of ilā"They are the ones who go foremost towards them"
3The lām reports belonging"The good things are theirs; they are the ones who go foremost"

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

And the word order must be recorded: lahā has been brought forwardwa hum lahā sābiqūn, "in them — foremost". This is the same pattern of fronting as in the six items of the first list. The list, that is, keeps its own word order in its closing sentence as well.

The closings of the two lists

The first listThe second list
The closing sentenceulāʾika humu'l-wārithūn (10)ulāʾika yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrāt (61)
The predicateA nounal-wārithūnA verbyusāriʿūn
The timeWhat is to be received in the futureWhat is being done now
Its continuationalladhīna yarithūna'l-firdawsa placewa hum lahā sābiqūna rank

Both closings begin with ulāʾika, and both gather the list up and attach it to a verdict. This is a feature shared by the two lists and can be verified in them.

I give this as my own reading: the first list states the place arrived at, the second the speed of going. The sūra has thereby described deliverance from two different directions: what will be received, and how the going is done.


23/62

وَلَا نُكَلِّفُ نَفْسًا إِلَّا وُسْعَهَا وَلَدَيْنَا كِتَٰبٌ يَنطِقُ بِٱلْحَقِّ وَهُمْ لَا يُظْلَمُونَ

wa lā nukallifu nafsan illā wusʿahā wa ladaynā kitābun yanṭiqu bi'l-ḥaqqi wa hum lā yuẓlamūn

"We do not burden any soul beyond its capacity. With Us is a book that speaks the truth, and they will not be wronged."

وَلَا نُكَلِّفُ نَفْسًا إِلَّا وُسْعَهَا

This sentence was treated at al-Baqara 2/286 (lā yukallifu'llāhu nafsan illā wusʿahā). I do not repeat it here. What was recorded there:

وُسْع — root و-س-ع: breadth. The measure, that is, is the person's own breadth. This sentence is a direct answer to the anxiety produced by verse 284, and it is the final expression of the principle of ease (2/185) seen again and again in the legal sections of that sūra.

I rely on that treatment. What belongs here is the difference of setting between the two verses, and it must be recorded:

al-Baqara 2/286al-Muʾminūn 23/62
The subject of the verbyukallifu'llāhuthe name is explicitnukallifufirst person plural
What it comes afterThe anxiety produced by 2/284 — will what is within us be reckoned tooThe race in verse 61 — hurrying to good things
What work it doesIt meets the anxietyIt sets the limit of the race
Its continuationlahā mā kasabat wa ʿalayhā mā'ktasabatwa ladaynā kitābun yanṭiqu bi'l-ḥaqq

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the place of the verse within the sūra: the sixty-first verse had spoken of a raceyusāriʿūn, sābiqūn. Immediately after the race a limit is set: no one is charged with what is beyond his capacity.

The sentence, that is, prevents those in front from being made the measure of those left behind. This reading is my own and is not binding.

The root ك-ل-ف: to take on a task with difficulty, hardship. Takalluf — doing a thing under strain; kulfa — trouble. The pattern is Form II: kallafa — to lay a task upon someone.

وَلَدَيْنَا كِتَٰبٌ يَنطِقُ بِٱلْحَقِّ — and a comparison with al-Jāthiya 45/29

This construction was treated at al-Jāthiya 45/29 (hādhā kitābunā yanṭiqu ʿalaykum bi'l-ḥaqq). What was recorded there:

The root ن-ط-ق: to speak, to give voice. The choice of verb is striking: the book does not "write" or "show" — it speaks.A document is normally read; the reading party interprets it. The verse removes this intermediary: the document speaks for itself.

I rely on that treatment. And the comparison of the two verses is the real work of this section, because the difference between them lies in a single word:

al-Jāthiya 45/29al-Muʾminūn 23/62
The sentencehādhā kitābunā yanṭiqu ʿalaykum bi'l-ḥaqqladaynā kitābun yanṭiqu bi'l-ḥaqq
The differenceʿalaykum"against you"Absent — no such particle comes
The position of the bookhādhāhere, openedladaynāwith Us, not yet opened
To whom it is saidTo the second person — at the moment of reckoningAbout the third person — in this world
The sceneThe resurrectiontarā kulla ummatin jāthiyaThis world — the discussion of the race and the burden
Its continuationinnā kunnā nastansikhu mā kuntum taʿmalūnwa hum lā yuẓlamūn

The difference is a single word, and it changes the direction of the meaning. In Arabic ʿalā here reports being against; this was recorded in al-Jāthiya.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the difference of scene between the two verses: in al-Jāthiya the book is opened and speaking against the one addressed — there the matter is finished. In al-Muʾminūn the book is still with Us, and only that "it speaks the truth" is reported — against whom is not said.

And this fits the work of the two verses: the sentence in al-Jāthiya is a verdict; the sentence in al-Muʾminūn is an assurance. Indeed its continuation is wa hum lā yuẓlamūn — "they will not be wronged."

And the construction bi'l-ḥaqq must itself be recorded: the book speaks the truth. It is reported, that is, that there is no difference between the record and what happened. The finding recorded for the word nastansikh (making a copy) in al-Jāthiya answers to this: the original is the life lived; the book is its copy.


23/63

بَلْ قُلُوبُهُمْ فِى غَمْرَةٍ مِّنْ هَٰذَا وَلَهُمْ أَعْمَٰلٌ مِّن دُونِ ذَٰلِكَ هُمْ لَهَا عَٰمِلُونَ

bal qulūbuhum fī ghamratin min hādhā wa lahum aʿmālun min dūni dhālika hum lahā ʿāmilūn

"No — their hearts are engulfed as regards this. And they have works besides that, which they keep on doing."

فِى غَمْرَةٍ — the word's second occurrence

The root was worked out at the fifty-fourth verse. What belongs here is the narrowing between the two occurrences, and it was tabulated there; in brief: at 54 what is surrounded is the persons, at 63 their hearts.

And the qualification min hādhā must be recorded: hādhā ("this") is a demonstrative pronoun, and what it is is not said.

The lexicographers give the referent of the pronoun in several ways:

ReadingWhat hādhā is
1The Qurʾān — the text set out in the sūra
2The attributes enumerated at 57-61 — the verses immediately before
3The reckoning and the returnilā rabbihim rājiʿūn in verse 60

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

And the word order must be recorded: the particle min here is explained by the lexicographers as "as regards…, in respect of…". The engulfment, that is, is not general but on a particular matter.

وَلَهُمْ أَعْمَٰلٌ مِّن دُونِ ذَٰلِكَ

Min dūni dhālika — "other than that, apart from that".

The lexicographers differ over what the sentence reports:

ReadingMeaning
1They have works outside the attributes enumerated — they do not possess those attributes
2There are deeds written for them, which they will do
3Lower works — dūn here means "below"

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

And a detail of the word order is worth recording: the end of the sentence is hum lahā ʿāmilūna fronted complement + an active participle. This is the pattern of the sūra's two lists of attributes (hum lahā sābiqūn, 61; hum fī ṣalātihim khāshiʿūn, 2).

I record this as an observation about the word order: the same pattern is used here for the other side. The sūra, that is, applies its own pattern of attributes to those left outside the list as well. This can be verified from the wording of the three verses.


23/64-65

حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَآ أَخَذْنَا مُتْرَفِيهِم بِٱلْعَذَابِ إِذَا هُمْ يَجْـَٔرُونَ · لَا تَجْـَٔرُوا۟ ٱلْيَوْمَ إِنَّكُم مِّنَّا لَا تُنصَرُونَ

ḥattā idhā akhadhnā mutrafīhim bi'l-ʿadhābi idhā hum yajʾarūn · lā tajʾarū'l-yawma innakum minnā lā tunṣarūn

"Until, when We seize those of them who live in ease with the punishment, at once they bellow for help. 'Do not bellow today: you will not be helped against Us.'"

حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا — the three turns in the sūra

This pattern opens three different scenes three times in the sūra:

VerseSentenceWhat it begins
64ḥattā idhā akhadhnā mutrafīhim bi'l-ʿadhābThe seizing in this world
77ḥattā idhā fataḥnā ʿalayhim bāban dhā ʿadhābin shadīdThe cutting off of hope
99ḥattā idhā jāʾa aḥadahumu'l-mawtThe moment of death

All three occurrences can be verified from the text. And I record this as my own reading: each time, the pattern marks the moment at which an ongoing state is cut off. Ḥattā is the particle that draws the limit of a going.

مُتْرَفِيهِم — the return of the root

The root ت-ر-ف was treated at the thirty-third verse. And the link tabulated there is completed here: at 33 atrafnāhum (We gave), at 64 mutrafīhim (those who live in ease) — the same root, once in the giving and once in the taking.

And the word order must be recorded: what is seized with the punishment is not the whole people but mutrafīhim — those among them who possess ease.

I give this as an observation, its ground being that the word comes in a genitive construction: mutrafīhim — "those of them who live in ease". The verse, that is, marks off one part from within a group. The same distinction had been made for al-malaʾ in the twenty-fourth, thirty-third and forty-sixth verses.

يَجْـَٔرُونَ — root: ج-أ-ر

The concrete sense of the root is given by the lexicographers as follows: the bellowing of cattle; and, generally, to shout aloud calling for help. Juʾār — bellowing.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series. The word occurs once more in the Qurʾān, at al-Naḥl 16/53 (thumma idhā massakumu'l-ḍurru fa-ilayhi tajʾarūn).

And the choice of verb is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading, its ground being that the root rests on an animal's cry: the verse does not say yadʿūn (they call) or yaṣrakhūn (they scream). The word chosen is the word used for a sound that has no words in it.

And the sixty-fifth verse forbids this sound: lā tajʾarū'l-yawm. The form of the prohibition resembles the pattern treated at al-Furqān 25/14 — there too the cry (thubūr) was not forbidden; they were told to multiply it. The difference here must be recorded: al-Furqān multiplies the cry, al-Muʾminūn cuts it off and gives a ground: innakum minnā lā tunṣarūn.

And the word order of the ground must be recorded: minnā has been brought forward — "against Us — you will not be helped". The impossibility of help, that is, is explained not by the absence of a helper but by who the other party is.


23/66-67

قَدْ كَانَتْ ءَايَٰتِى تُتْلَىٰ عَلَيْكُمْ فَكُنتُمْ عَلَىٰٓ أَعْقَٰبِكُمْ تَنكِصُونَ · مُسْتَكْبِرِينَ بِهِۦ سَٰمِرًا تَهْجُرُونَ

qad kānat āyātī tutlā ʿalaykum fa-kuntum ʿalā aʿqābikum tankiṣūn · mustakbirīna bihī sāmiran tahjurūn

"My signs were being recited to you, and you were drawing back on your heels — puffed up with pride against it, talking nonsense by night."

قَدْ كَانَتْ ءَايَٰتِى تُتْلَىٰ عَلَيْكُمْ — and the weave with verse 105

This sentence will return almost word for word in the hundred and fifth verse of the sūra:

VerseSentenceWhere it is said
66qad kānat āyātī tutlā ʿalaykumin the indicativeIn this world — the scene of the seizing with punishment
105a-lam takun āyātī tutlā ʿalaykumin the interrogativeIn the hereafter — inside the Fire

The same sentence, once as a statement and once as a question. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

I record this as my own reading: the sentence is said twice, and in both the same thing is recalled. The sūra, that is, shows the same reminder being made at two different times — one while there is still time, the other after it has passed.

عَلَىٰٓ أَعْقَٰبِكُمْ تَنكِصُون

The root ن-ك-ص: to go backwards, to turn back. The lexicographers record the sense of the root as "to draw back from a work one has begun".

أَعْقَاب — the plural of ʿaqib: heels. The root ع-ق-ب: the back, the end of a thing. ʿĀqiba — outcome; taʿqīb — coming after; ʿuqbā — the end.

The picture in the idiom must be recorded: ʿalā aʿqābikum tankiṣūnto go backwards on one's heels. That is, not to turn and flee; to withdraw while the face stays turned the same way.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being this picture in the idiom: the movement is not a turning away but a drawing back. Moving off while still looking at what is being said.

The same idiom occurs elsewhere in the Qurʾān as well — Āl ʿImrān 3/144 (inqalabtum ʿalā aʿqābikum), al-Anfāl 8/48, al-Māʾida 5/21.

مُسْتَكْبِرِينَ بِهِ — the disagreement over the pronoun's referent

The exegetes differ over what the pronoun bihī in the sentence refers back to, and this is the most disputed place in the verse:

ReadingWhat bihī isMeaning
1The Qurʾān / the signs"Puffed up with pride against it"
2The Ḥaram / the Sacred Mosque"Puffed up with pride by it (by the guardianship of the Ḥaram)"
3The Prophet"Puffed up with pride concerning him"
4The night talk (samar)Bihī attaches to the following word

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

It is transmitted that the second reading has a historical ground: the Meccans counted the service of the Kaʿba a mark of superiority. I pass this historical frame on as it is transmitted.

سَٰمِرًا — root: س-م-ر

The concrete sense of the root: to converse by night. Samar — the darkness of the night and the talk carried on in that darkness; sāmir — one who talks by night; summār — night talkers.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series.

The word order must be recorded: sāmiran is singular, yet it comes as a circumstantial accusative to a plural. The lexicographers explain this by counting it a generic noun: a singular form reporting a group.

And the scene the word carries is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading, its ground being the "night" sense of the root: the verse describes not a debate but a gathering for talk at night. Not a place where anything is decided, a place where things are said.

تَهْجُرُون — the variant reading and the root

The root ه-ج-ر: to part, to abandon; and to speak deliriously (hujr). The root was treated at al-Furqān 25/30 (ittakhadhū hādhā'l-qurʾāna mahjūrā), at al-Muzzammil 73/10 and at al-Muddaththir 74/5. I do not repeat it here.

The variant reading must be recorded, and it bears on the meaning:

ReadingPatternMeaning
tahjurūnForm I"You abandon it" or "you speak deliriously"
tuhjirūnForm IV"You speak foully" — ihjār, to utter obscenity

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And at al-Furqān 25/30 the two branches of this root were tabulated:

ReadingMeaning
1Abandoned — not recited, not put into practice
2Spoken of with nonsense — from the hujr branch of the root

I rely on that treatment. And what belongs here is the comparison of the two verses:

al-Furqān 25/30al-Muʾminūn 23/67
Who says itThe messenger — a complaint to his LordThe text — addressing the one spoken to
Patternmahjūrāa passive participletahjurūnan imperfect verb
Objecthādhā'l-qurʾānnamed openlyNot named — not even a pronoun
What it reportsA state — the condition of the BookAn act — one done continually

The same root, in two sūras, around the same subject. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.


23/68-70

أَفَلَمْ يَدَّبَّرُوا۟ ٱلْقَوْلَ أَمْ جَآءَهُم مَّا لَمْ يَأْتِ ءَابَآءَهُمُ ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ · أَمْ لَمْ يَعْرِفُوا۟ رَسُولَهُمْ فَهُمْ لَهُۥ مُنكِرُونَ · أَمْ يَقُولُونَ بِهِۦ جِنَّةٌۢ بَلْ جَآءَهُم بِٱلْحَقِّ وَأَكْثَرُهُمْ لِلْحَقِّ كَٰرِهُونَ

a-fa-lam yaddabbarū'l-qawla am jāʾahum mā lam yaʾti ābāʾahumu'l-awwalīn · am lam yaʿrifū rasūlahum fa-hum lahū munkirūn · am yaqūlūna bihī jinnatun bal jāʾahum bi'l-ḥaqqi wa aktharuhum li'l-ḥaqqi kārihūn

"Have they not pondered the word? Or has something come to them that did not come to their forefathers of old? Or did they not recognise their messenger, so that they reject him? Or do they say 'there is madness in him'? No — he brought them the truth, but most of them are averse to the truth."

Four questions — how the pattern is built

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the three verses: one question (a-fa-lam), and after it three am questions. In Arabic am brings an alternative to the first question.

OrderVerseQuestionWhat it tests
168a-fa-lam yaddabbarū'l-qawlHave they not pondered — cause: inattention
268am jāʾahum mā lam yaʾti ābāʾahumHas something new come — cause: unfamiliarity
369am lam yaʿrifū rasūlahumDo they not recognise him — cause: strangeness
470am yaqūlūna bihī jinnaDo they call him mad — cause: unfitness

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the order of the four questions: four possible grounds are counted off one by one and not one of them is confirmed. Then comes balthe particle that cancels what went before and sets down the real cause (treated at al-Furqān 25/11).

And the real cause set down is not a lack of knowledge: wa aktharuhum li'l-ḥaqqi kārihūn"most of them are averse to the truth."

This is the same line treated at al-Baqara 2/213 and al-Shūrā 42/14: the cause of the division is not knowledge but disposition. I rely on that treatment.

يَدَّبَّرُوا۟ — root: د-ب-ر

The concrete sense of the root: the back, the end of a thing. Dubur — the back; adbara — he turned his back; tadabburto look at the back, at the end, of a thing.

The word occurs in exactly this setting in several places in the Qurʾān: al-Nisāʾ 4/82 (a-fa-lā yatadabbarūna'l-qurʾān), Muḥammad 47/24 (treated in Muḥammad), Ṣād 38/29 (li-yaddabbarū āyātih; treated in Ṣād).

And the object of the verb here must be recorded: al-qawl — "the word". Not the Qurʾān, not the signs. The question, that is, looks not at the name of the text but at the thing said itself.

I record this as an observation: the choice of word does not ask the one addressed to accept the sourceonly to think what is said through to the end.

The pattern must be recorded: yaddabbarū, its original being yatadabbarū; the tāʾ has been assimilated to the dāl. Among the variant readings yatadabbarū is also transmitted. It does not change the meaning.

أَمْ جَآءَهُم مَّا لَمْ يَأْتِ ءَابَآءَهُمُ ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ

This construction occurred in the twenty-fourth verse in the mouth of Noah's people: mā samiʿnā bi-hādhā fī ābāʾinā'l-awwalīn. And it was tabulated there.

What belongs here is this, and I give it as my own reading: in the twenty-fourth verse it was the ground of the refusal — "we did not hear of it among our forefathers". In the sixty-eighth the same expression is turned into a question — "or has something come that did not come to their forefathers?"

The question, that is, tests the assumption the ground rests on. And the sūra has already refuted that assumption from the twenty-third verse onwards: the same call has been repeated since Noah.

أَمْ لَمْ يَعْرِفُوا۟ رَسُولَهُمْ

The root ع-ر-ف: to recognise. The lexicographers record a distinction between maʿrifa and ʿilm: maʿrifa is the recognising again of something already known; ʿilm is general.

And rasūlahum — "their own messenger". The possessive pronoun must be recorded: the messenger belongs to them, he did not come from outside. The same qualification was set in the thirty-second verse: rasūlan minhum.

I record this as an observation: the question tests not the messenger's identity but whether they recognise him. And it cannot be said that they do not, because the messenger is one of them. The question is therefore put in order to remain unanswered.

أَمْ يَقُولُونَ بِهِۦ جِنَّةٌ

This construction was used for Noah in the twenty-fifth verse — in exactly the same two words: bihī jinna. And it was tabulated there.

What belongs here is this: the fourth question is taken from the narrative the sūra itself has told. The sentence used in putting the question, that is, was given thirty-five verses earlier in the mouth of Noah's people.

بَلْ جَآءَهُم بِٱلْحَقِّ وَأَكْثَرُهُمْ لِلْحَقِّ كَٰرِهُونَ

The word order must be recorded: the word al-ḥaqq occurs twice — once as what is brought, once as what is disliked. And the second has been brought forward: wa aktharuhum li'l-ḥaqqi kārihūn.

The root ك-ر-ه: to dislike, not to want; and compulsion (ikrāh). The lexicographers record under this root both an unwillingness that comes from within and a compulsion that comes from without.

And the qualification aktharuhum must be recorded: "most of them". Not all.

This is an instance, verifiable from the text, of the principle recorded in Method that no blanket ruling is issued. A table was built for the same point at the end of al-Ṣāffāt (the entries on aktharu'l-awwalīn). I rely on that treatment.


23/71

وَلَوِ ٱتَّبَعَ ٱلْحَقُّ أَهْوَآءَهُمْ لَفَسَدَتِ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتُ وَٱلْأَرْضُ وَمَن فِيهِنَّ بَلْ أَتَيْنَٰهُم بِذِكْرِهِمْ فَهُمْ عَن ذِكْرِهِم مُّعْرِضُونَ

wa lawi'ttabaʿa'l-ḥaqqu ahwāʾahum la-fasadati'l-samāwātu wa'l-arḍu wa man fīhinn, bal ataynāhum bi-dhikrihim fa-hum ʿan dhikrihim muʿriḍūn

"If the truth had followed their desires, the heavens and the earth and all in them would have gone to ruin. No — We brought them their own reminder, and they turn away from their own reminder."

ٱلْحَقّ — the disagreement over the referent

The exegetes differ over what al-ḥaqq, the subject of the sentence, is, and the difference changes how the proof works:

ReadingWhat al-Ḥaqq isThe sense of the sentence
1Godal-Ḥaqq is one of the names"If God had followed their desires…"
2The Qurʾān / the revelation"If the revelation had come according to their desires…"
3The truth, what is real, what is right — in the abstract"If the real had been subject to their desires…"
4Justice / order"If the order had been set up according to their desires…"

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

And in all four the logic of the proof is the same, and this must be recorded: an order subject to desire ceases to be an order. For desires are many and contradict one another; they cannot all be followed at once.

لَفَسَدَتِ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتُ وَٱلْأَرْضُ — the form of the proof

The root ف-س-د: to spoil, to lose one's order. Fasād — the falling apart of an order; ifsād — corrupting. The word was treated at al-Baqara 2/11-12 and at Ṣād 38/28.

Another proof built with the same verb was treated at al-Anbiyāʾ 21/22: law kāna fīhimā ālihatun illā'llāhu la-fasadatā, "had there been in the two of them gods besides God, the two would have gone to ruin." I rely on that treatment.

The two proofs can be compared:

al-Anbiyāʾ 21/22al-Muʾminūn 23/71
The hypothetical conditionMore than one godThe truth following desire
The consequencela-fasadatāthe two would go to ruinla-fasadati'l-samāwātu wa'l-arḍu wa man fīhinn
ScopeSky and earthSky, earth and all in them
What it is built againstAssociation of partnersHawā

The difference must be recorded: the proof of al-Anbiyāʾ is built against shirk, that of al-Muʾminūn against hawā. And the sentence in al-Anbiyāʾ ends with subḥāna'llāhi rabbi'l-ʿarshi ʿammā yaṣifūn; in al-Muʾminūn the same sentence of tanzīh will come twenty verses later, in the ninety-first verse.

And al-Muʾminūn's own counterpart will come in the ninety-first verse: law kāna maʿahū min ilāhin idhan la-dhahaba kullu ilāhin bimā khalaqa wa la-ʿalā baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍ. The sūra, that is, builds two hypothetical proofs: one by way of hawā (71), the other by way of multiplicity (91). This is a pairing that can be verified within the sūra.

أَهْوَآء — root: ه-و-ي

The root was treated in detail at al-Jāthiya 45/23 (a-fa-raʾayta mani'ttakhadha ilāhahū hawāh) — where the two readings of the construction ilāhahū hawāh were tabulated. And the same sentence was taken up again at al-Furqān 25/43, where the analysis in al-Jāthiya was relied on. I do not repeat it here.

The summary of the root is this: ه-و-ي: to fall, to go down; and to feel desire. Both branches are recorded.

What belongs here is that the word comes in the plural: ahwāʾ.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this plural: in al-Jāthiya hawāh was singular — the desire of one person. Here it is plural: the desires of a community. And the working of the proof depends precisely on this plural: a single desire can be followed; desires that contradict one another cannot all be followed at once. This is the ground of the ruin.

PlaceWordNumberConsequence
al-Jāthiya 45/23hawāhSingularIndividual — being sealed
al-Furqān 25/43hawāhSingularIndividual — the limit of responsibility
al-Muʾminūn 23/71ahwāʾahumPluralCosmic — the ruin of the heavens and the earth

Three occurrences, the same root, the scale growing. This is a series that can be verified from the three texts.

بَلْ أَتَيْنَٰهُم بِذِكْرِهِمْ

And the second half of the sentence sets a separate question.

ذِكْرِهِمْ — the possessive pronoun must be recorded: "their reminder". It does not say the Qurʾān or the revelation.

The exegetes differ over the sense of the construction:

ReadingWhat dhikruhum is
1A reminder belonging to them — the reminder sent down for them
2Their own honour, their being remembered — the sense of dhikr as "renown, standing" (at al-Zukhruf 43/44, wa innahū la-dhikrun laka wa li-qawmik)
3A book coming in their own tongue

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

The second reading is worth recording, because it sharpens the sentence: if what is brought is their own standing, then what they turn away from is what is in their favour.

فَهُمْ عَن ذِكْرِهِم مُّعْرِضُون — the weave with the third verse

And here another verbal weave of the sūra is completed.

In the third verse the item of the list ran: wa'lladhīna hum ʿani'l-laghwi muʿriḍūn — "those who turn away from idle speech". The same pattern returns here unchanged: fa-hum ʿan dhikrihim muʿriḍūn.

VersePatternWhat is turned away fromVerdict
3hum ʿani'l-laghwi muʿriḍūnIdle speechAn attribute
71hum ʿan dhikrihim muʿriḍūnTheir own reminderA fault

Exactly the same word order, the same active participle, two different objects. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and it was recorded at the third verse as well.

I give this as my own reading: the sūra takes a pattern from its own list of attributes and uses it for the other side — and changes the object. The verb is the same; what settles the verdict is what is being turned away from.


23/72

أَمْ تَسْـَٔلُهُمْ خَرْجًا فَخَرَاجُ رَبِّكَ خَيْرٌ وَهُوَ خَيْرُ ٱلرَّٰزِقِينَ

am tasʾaluhum kharjan fa-kharāju rabbika khayr, wa huwa khayru'l-rāziqīn

"Or are you asking them for a payment? Your Lord's return is better; and He is the best of providers."

The fifth am question

The verse is the continuation of the series of am questions that began in the sixty-eighth verse — the fifth question. And its difference from the earlier ones must be recorded: the first four tested the condition of the other side; this one tests the condition of the messenger.

I record this as an observation: one more possible obstacle is eliminated — the messenger's having an interest of his own.

خَرْج and خَرَاج — the variant reading and the difference

Not the root ح-ر-ج but خ-ر-ج: to go out. Kharj — what is taken out, the price paid; kharāj — tax, revenue, yield.

A variant reading is transmitted:

ReadingThe two words
1kharjanfa-kharāju rabbik
2kharājanfa-kharāju rabbikboth in the same pattern
3kharjanfa-kharju rabbikboth in the same pattern

All three readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

And the lexicographers dwell on the difference between the two words in the first reading:

WordThe sense the lexicographers give
خَرْجA thing paid once, a fee
خَرَاجA revenue that comes continually, yield, tax

I pass this distinction on as it is transmitted. And on the first reading the sentence builds a comparison: what might be asked for is a single payment, what is given in return is continual.

The same question in other sūras

This question is a repeated pattern in the Qurʾān:

PlaceSentence
al-Furqān 25/57mā asʾalukum ʿalayhi min ajrin illā man shāʾa an yattakhidha ilā rabbihī sabīlā
al-Shūrā 42/23lā asʾalukum ʿalayhi ajran illā'l-mawaddata fi'l-qurbā
al-Qalam 68/46am tasʾaluhum ajran fa-hum min maghramin muthqalūn
al-Ṭūr 52/40am tasʾaluhum ajran fa-hum min maghramin muthqalūn
al-Muʾminūn 23/72am tasʾaluhum kharjan fa-kharāju rabbika khayr

In all five places the same work is done: it is recorded that the messenger has no interest of his own. This pattern was treated at al-Furqān 25/57, where the form of the exception was recorded: what was asked for was not a thing that leaves the giver's hand. I rely on that treatment.

And the difference of al-Muʾminūn must be recorded: al-Furqān and al-Shūrā build an exception (illā); al-Ṭūr and al-Qalam name the burden on the other side; al-Muʾminūn, for its part, makes a comparisonfa-kharāju rabbika khayr. The refusal of the demand, that is, is grounded in the alternative's being better.

وَهُوَ خَيْرُ ٱلرَّٰزِقِين

The third of the five superlative constructions in the sūra (14, 29, 72, 109, 118).

The root ر-ز-ق: what reaches a living being and is drawn benefit from. The lexicographers do not confine the root to property; knowledge, health and children are counted rizq as well.

And the construction's link with al-khayr must be recorded: the verse uses the word khayr twice — once as a comparative (khayrun), once as a superlative (khayru'l-rāziqīn). The same word, in two patterns.


23/73-74

وَإِنَّكَ لَتَدْعُوهُمْ إِلَىٰ صِرَٰطٍ مُّسْتَقِيمٍ · وَإِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱلْءَاخِرَةِ عَنِ ٱلصِّرَٰطِ لَنَٰكِبُونَ

wa innaka la-tadʿūhum ilā ṣirāṭin mustaqīm · wa inna'lladhīna lā yuʾminūna bi'l-ākhirati ʿani'l-ṣirāṭi la-nākibūn

"You are indeed calling them to a straight path. And those who do not believe in the hereafter are turning aside from the path."

صِرَٰط مُّسْتَقِيم

The construction was treated in detail in al-Fātiḥa. I do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is the difference of definiteness between the two verses, and it must be recorded:

VerseConstructionDefiniteness
73ṣirāṭin mustaqīmIndefinite
74ʿani'l-ṣirāṭDefinite

The seventy-fourth verse takes back with the article alif-lām the path named in the verse before. In Arabic this is an operation called ʿahd dhikrī: a thing first mentioned indefinitely is then repeated as definite. The lexicographers record this consistently.

نَٰكِبُون — root: ن-ك-ب

The concrete sense of the root: to swerve to one side, to slip sideways. Mankibthe shoulder (the side of the trunk); nakbāʾ — the wind that blows from between the cardinal directions; nakba — a calamity (falling off the road).

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series.

And a comparison with tankiṣūn in the sixty-sixth verse is worth recording, because the two words are close in sound but are separate roots:

WordRootThe movement
tankiṣūn (66)ن-ك-صTo go backwards — on the same road, in the reverse direction
nākibūn (74)ن-ك-بTo swerve to one side — to go off the road

That the two roots are separate is certain, and I build no derivational link between them. The note of caution entered for roots close in sound in ʿAbasa and al-Muṭaffifīn holds here as well.

But that the two words stand in the same sūra, eight verses apart, is a datum, and I record it as an observation: the sūra names two distinct ways of leaving the road — drawing back, and swerving aside. The first is staying on the road and not advancing; the second is leaving the road.

وَإِنَّ ٱلَّذِينَ لَا يُؤْمِنُونَ بِٱلْءَاخِرَة

And the condition must be recorded: not believing in the hereafter is given as the ground of the swerving.

This is on the same line as the finding recorded at al-Furqān 25/11: bal kadhdhabū bi'l-sāʿa"that is not the real matter: they denied the Hour." I rely on that treatment.

The two sūras make the same diagnosis: beneath the objections that are voiced lies an unvoiced rejection of the hereafter. And al-Muʾminūn had done the same in the thirty-third verse: wa kadhdhabū bi-liqāʾi'l-ākhira.

VerseSentenceAbout whom
33kadhdhabū bi-liqāʾi'l-ākhiraAn unnamed people
74lā yuʾminūna bi'l-ākhiraThose addressed

The same diagnosis, in two places.


23/75-76

وَلَوْ رَحِمْنَٰهُمْ وَكَشَفْنَا مَا بِهِم مِّن ضُرٍّ لَّلَجُّوا۟ فِى طُغْيَٰنِهِمْ يَعْمَهُونَ · وَلَقَدْ أَخَذْنَٰهُم بِٱلْعَذَابِ فَمَا ٱسْتَكَانُوا۟ لِرَبِّهِمْ وَمَا يَتَضَرَّعُونَ

wa law raḥimnāhum wa kashafnā mā bihim min ḍurrin la-lajjū fī ṭughyānihim yaʿmahūn · wa laqad akhadhnāhum bi'l-ʿadhābi fa-ma'stakānū li-rabbihim wa mā yataḍarraʿūn

"Were We to have mercy on them and lift the affliction that is upon them, they would persist in their transgression, wandering blindly. We seized them with the punishment, assuredly; and they did not bow to their Lord, nor do they entreat."

What the two verses build together

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the two verses: the seventy-fifth verse tries the case of mercy, the seventy-sixth the case of punishment. In both cases the outcome is the same.

VerseWhat is triedOutcome
75raḥimnāhum wa kashafnā mā bihim min ḍurrwere the affliction liftedla-lajjū fī ṭughyānihimthe obstinacy would continue
76akhadhnāhum bi'l-ʿadhābthey were seized with the punishmentfa-ma'stakānū … wa mā yataḍarraʿūnthey did not bow

And the difference must be recorded: the seventy-fifth verse is hypothetical (law — a condition that did not occur); the seventy-sixth reports something that did happen (wa laqad).

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the setting of these two moods side by side: one tells an untried possibility, the other a tried fact. And the two come out at the same result. The verse, that is, shows that the bearing does not depend on outward circumstances.

لَّلَجُّوا۟ — root: ل-ج-ج

The concrete sense of the root: to hold out in a matter and keep at it; and the mingling of sounds, a din. Lajja — he persisted; lujja — the deep middle of the sea (where the waves mingle together; at al-Naml 27/44, lujjatan); lajāj — obstinacy.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series.

The link between the two branches of the root is worth recording, and I give this as an observation about the language: both the middle of the sea and obstinacy come from the same root. The lexicographers build the link by way of mingling and being sunk into. The word describes a person's sinking deeper into the state he is already in.

طُغْيَٰنِهِمْ يَعْمَهُون

The root ط-غ-ي / ط-غ-و: to exceed the bound, to overflow. Ṭughyān — the overflowing of water (al-Ḥāqqa 69/11lammā ṭagha'l-māʾ; treated in al-Ḥāqqa). The root was treated at al-Nāziʿāt 79/17 and 79/37, and at al-ʿAlaq 96/6.

The root ع-م-ه: to flounder in bewilderment, not to know what to do. The lexicographers record a distinction between ʿamā (blindness of the eye) and ʿamah (bewilderment of discernment).

And the construction occurs regularly in the Qurʾān: al-Baqara 2/15 (wa yamudduhum fī ṭughyānihim yaʿmahūn), al-Anʿām 6/110, al-Aʿrāf 7/186, Yūnus 10/11.

And the link between al-Baqara 2/15 and this verse is worth recording: there the verb is yamudduhum (We extend), here la-lajjū (they would persist). That verse was treated in al-Baqara.

فَمَا ٱسْتَكَانُوا۟ — a disagreement over the root of the word

The lexicographers differ over which root the word comes from:

ViewRootExplanation
1س-ك-نIstakāna — Form X: to grow still, to submit. The alif is for lengthening
2ك-ي-ن / ك-و-نFrom kānato be brought low, to be made small; al-kawn (a low position)

Both views are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. On both the sense is close: to submit, to be brought low.

And the root س-ك-ن occurred in the eighteenth verse of this sūra (fa-askannāhu fi'l-arḍ). If the first view is right, the same root is used twice in the sūra, once for water and once for a human being. I give this as an entry; since the disagreement over the root is unresolved, I draw no conclusion from it.

وَمَا يَتَضَرَّعُونَ — the change of tense

The root ض-ر-ع: to be brought low, to be weak and submissive. Ḍarʿ — the hanging of the udder; taḍarruʿ — Form V: to entreat by lowering oneself.

And the word order must be recorded, and this is the finest point of the verse: the two verbs come in two different tenses.

VerbMoodWhat it reports
ma'stakānūPerfect, negatedAt that moment they did not bow — a finished fact
wa mā yataḍarraʿūnImperfect, negatedStill they do not entreat — ongoing

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this difference of mood: the verse reports first the reaction at that moment and then the ongoing state. The punishment has passed, that is, but the bearing has not stopped.

And the same line is treated at al-Anʿām 6/43 (fa-lawlā idh jāʾahum baʾsunā taḍarraʿū). In this commentary a similar word order was treated at al-Mulk 67/21 (bal lajjū fī ʿutuwwin wa nufūr) — there too the obstinacy came after an opportunity. I rely on that treatment.


23/77

حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا فَتَحْنَا عَلَيْهِم بَابًا ذَا عَذَابٍ شَدِيدٍ إِذَا هُمْ فِيهِ مُبْلِسُونَ

ḥattā idhā fataḥnā ʿalayhim bāban dhā ʿadhābin shadīdin idhā hum fīhi mublisūn

"Until, when We open upon them a gate of severe punishment, at once they are stripped of hope in it."

فَتَحْنَا عَلَيْهِم بَابًا — the choice of verb

The root ف-ت-ح: to open. The root was treated in detail in al-Fatḥ on the occasion of that sūra's name. I do not repeat it here.

And the use of the verb here is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: in the Qurʾān the pattern fataḥnā ʿalayhim is mostly used for a favour — al-Anʿām 6/44 (fataḥnā ʿalayhim abwāba kulli shayʾ), al-Aʿrāf 7/96 (la-fataḥnā ʿalayhim barakātin mina'l-samāʾi wa'l-arḍ).

Here the same pattern is used for a gate of punishment.

PlaceWhat is openedWhat it is
al-Anʿām 6/44abwāba kulli shayʾthe gates of everythingA favour
al-Aʿrāf 7/96barakātin mina'l-samāʾi wa'l-arḍBlessings
al-Muʾminūn 23/77bāban dhā ʿadhābin shadīdPunishment

The same pattern, the reverse content. This is a contrast that can be verified from the three texts.

And the continuation of al-Anʿām 6/44 must be recorded, because it lies on the same line: there, after the gates of favour are opened, akhadhnāhum baghtatan follows. In both verses, that is, the gate that opens is a turning point.

And the difference of singular and plural is worth recording: in al-Anʿām abwāb (gates, plural), here bāban (a gate, singular and indefinite). I give this as an observation about the word order.

مُبْلِسُون — root: ب-ل-س

The sense of the root is given by the lexicographers as follows: to have one's hope cut off, to be left helpless and bewildered; to find nothing to say. Iblās — Form IV.

And the lexicographers record that the name Iblīs is derived from this root — "the one whose hope is cut off". I pass this explanation on as it is transmitted; there are other views on the origin of the word (a view that it comes from a non-Arabic name is transmitted) and I do not impose a preference.

The word occurs in several places in the Qurʾān: al-Anʿām 6/44 (fa-idhā hum mublisūn), al-Rūm 30/12 and 30/49 (treated in al-Rūm), al-Zukhruf 43/75 (treated in al-Zukhruf).

And the overlap between al-Anʿām 6/44 and this verse must be recorded: both verses begin with fataḥnā ʿalayhim and both end with mublisūn. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.

إِذَاإِذَا — two occurrences of idhā

The word order must be recorded: there are two separate occurrences of idhā in the sentence. The first is the conditional particle (idhā fataḥnā), the second the idhā fujāʾiyya — the particle reporting "all at once" (idhā hum fīhi mublisūn).

The same structure was used in the sixty-fourth verse as well: ḥattā idhā akhadhnā mutrafīhim bi'l-ʿadhābi idhā hum yajʾarūn.

I compare the two verses:

6477
The conditionakhadhnā mutrafīhim bi'l-ʿadhābfataḥnā ʿalayhim bāban dhā ʿadhābin shadīd
The sudden resultidhā hum yajʾarūnbellowingidhā hum fīhi mublisūnhope cut off
SoundPresent — bellowingAbsentiblās, finding nothing to say

The difference is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: in the sixty-fourth verse there was a sound; in the seventy-seventh the sound too is cut off. At the core of the word iblās lies finding nothing to say. Block VI closes with the cutting off of sound.


23/78

وَهُوَ ٱلَّذِىٓ أَنشَأَ لَكُمُ ٱلسَّمْعَ وَٱلْأَبْصَٰرَ وَٱلْأَفْـِٔدَةَ قَلِيلًا مَّا تَشْكُرُونَ

wa huwa'lladhī anshaʾa lakumu'l-samʿa wa'l-abṣāra wa'l-afʾidah, qalīlan mā tashkurūn

"It is He who built up for you hearing and sight and hearts. How little you give thanks!"

The triad of hearing, sight and heart — the fifth link

At al-Sajda 32/9 this triad was treated for the fourth time and a table of four links was built. The fifth link is here, and I extend the table:

PlaceSentenceVerbThe work of the triad
al-Aḥqāf 46/26wa jaʿalnā lahum samʿan wa abṣāran wa afʾidatan fa-mā aghnā ʿanhum…jaʿalaGiven — it availed nothing
al-Jāthiya 45/23wa khatama ʿalā samʿihī wa qalbihī wa jaʿala ʿalā baṣarihī ghishāwatankhatama / jaʿalaClosed — a seal and a veil
Fuṣṣilat 41/20shahida ʿalayhim samʿuhum wa abṣāruhum wa julūduhumshahidaThey bore witness — the third is skin
al-Sajda 32/9wa jaʿala lakum … qalīlan mā tashkurūnjaʿalaGiven — no thanks were given
al-Muʾminūn 23/78wa huwa'lladhī anshaʾa lakum … qalīlan mā tashkurūnanshaʾaBuilt up — no thanks were given

In all five places the same three gates are enumerated; in each place in a different condition.

The meaning of the ordering was recorded at al-Aḥqāf 46/26 and holds here too: it goes from outside inward — what is heard → what is seen → what is weighed within. The root of the word أَفْـِٔدَة (ف-ء-د, the burning of an ember; fuʾād, the kindling side of the heart) was worked out there; I do not repeat it here.

And samʿ is singular, abṣār and afʾida plural. The lexicographers explain the difference by hearing being of a single kind; I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted. In all five of the five verses the same singular-plural arrangement is kept (in Fuṣṣilat it differs because the third is julūd).

al-Sajda 32/9 and al-Muʾminūn 23/78 — the difference of verb

These two verses are the closest to one another of the five links: both end with the same sentence (qalīlan mā tashkurūn). The difference between them lies in the verb, and it must be recorded:

al-Sajda 32/9al-Muʾminūn 23/78
The verbjaʿala — put from one state into anotheranshaʾaset up, built
The build of the sentencewa jaʿala lakuma conjunction to the preceding sentencewa huwa'lladhī anshaʾa lakuman independent nominal sentence
What precedessawwāhu wa nafakha fīhi min rūḥihthe forming of the human beingidhā hum fīhi mublisūn (77) — the scene of punishment
What followswa qālū a-idhā ḍalalnā fi'l-arḍthe objection about resurrectionwa huwa'lladhī dharaʾakum fi'l-arḍ (79) — two further proofs

The difference of verb is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: jaʿala reports putting what exists into a state; anshaʾa setting up, standing upright. This sense of the root was worked out in al-Wāqiʿa, where it was recorded: the verb reports a rebuilding.

And the root has five occurrences in this sūra (14, 19, 31, 42, 78) — tabulated at the nineteenth verse. The fifth occurrence is here, and it is the last row of the table: the sūra tells of the organs with the same verb it used for the human being, the gardens and the generations.

قَلِيلًا مَّا تَشْكُرُون

The word order was treated at al-Sajda 32/9 and holds here too: qalīlan has been brought forward (taqdīm); and here is either a reinforcer of the negation or a particle of the verbal noun; both parsings are transmitted. I do not repeat it here.

What belongs here is the place of the sentence within the sūra: the seventy-seventh verse had ended with the cutting off of sound (mublisūn). The seventy-eighth opens a new block by enumerating three gates that were given.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the order of the two verses: immediately after the scene of punishment, the organs of sense and understanding are named. A link is built between the two verses: at the place where hope is cut off, the instruments that went unused are recalled. This is a reading, and it is not binding.


23/79-80

وَهُوَ ٱلَّذِى ذَرَأَكُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ وَإِلَيْهِ تُحْشَرُونَ · وَهُوَ ٱلَّذِى يُحْىِۦ وَيُمِيتُ وَلَهُ ٱخْتِلَٰفُ ٱلَّيْلِ وَٱلنَّهَارِ أَفَلَا تَعْقِلُونَ

wa huwa'lladhī dharaʾakum fi'l-arḍi wa ilayhi tuḥsharūn · wa huwa'lladhī yuḥyī wa yumītu wa lahu'khtilāfu'l-layli wa'l-nahār, a-fa-lā taʿqilūn

"It is He who scattered you over the earth, and to Him you will be gathered. It is He who gives life and gives death, and the alternation of night and day belongs to Him. Will you not use your reason?"

Three occurrences of wa huwa'lladhī — the repetition of the pattern

The seventy-eighth, seventy-ninth and eightieth verses all three begin with the same pattern: wa huwa'lladhī. This is a fact that can be verified from the text.

VerseWhat is givenThe closing
78Hearing, sight, heartsqalīlan mā tashkurūnthanks
79Being scattered over the earthwa ilayhi tuḥsharūngathering
80Giving life, giving death, night and daya-fa-lā taʿqilūnreason

I record this as my own reading, its ground being that the three closings differ: three verses are built on the same pattern but attached to three different places — to thanks, to gathering, and to reason. The same proof, that is, is carried to three different conclusions.

ذَرَأَكُمْ — root: ذ-ر-أ

The concrete sense of the root: to scatter as one scatters seed, to multiply. The lexicographers describe the root as lying somewhere between creating and scattering.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series. The word occurs in several places in the Qurʾān: al-Aʿrāf 7/179 (wa laqad dharaʾnā li-jahannama), al-Naḥl 16/13, al-Shūrā 42/11 (yadhraʾukum fīh; it occurred in al-Shūrā), al-Mulk 67/24 (alladhī dharaʾakum fi'l-arḍ; treated in al-Mulk).

And the overlap between al-Mulk 67/24 and this verse must be recorded: the two sentences are almost exactly the same.

PlaceSentence
al-Mulk 67/24qul huwa'lladhī dharaʾakum fi'l-arḍi wa ilayhi tuḥsharūn
al-Muʾminūn 23/79wa huwa'lladhī dharaʾakum fi'l-arḍi wa ilayhi tuḥsharūn

The only difference is at the beginning: al-Mulk has the command qul (say), here it is absent. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.

And a detail of the word order is worth recording: fi'l-arḍ (scattering over the earth) and ilayhi tuḥsharūn (being gathered to Him) are opposite directions. A dispersal and a gathering.

The root ح-ش-ر: to bring together what is scattered. The root was worked out in al-Ḥashr on the occasion of that sūra's name. I do not repeat it here.

وَلَهُ ٱخْتِلَٰفُ ٱلَّيْلِ وَٱلنَّهَار

The root خ-ل-ف: to be left behind; to take another's place. Ikhtilāf — Form VIII: coming one after another; and falling into disagreement. Both senses come out of the root.

And the sense here is the first: the alternation of night and day.

The same phenomenon was told with a different word at al-Furqān 25/62: wa huwa'lladhī jaʿala'l-layla wa'l-nahāra khilfatan li-man arāda an yadhdhakkara aw arāda shukūrā. And it was treated there.

The two verses can be compared:

al-Furqān 25/62al-Muʾminūn 23/80
The wordkhilfatana nounikhtilāfa verbal noun
For whatli-man arāda an yadhdhakkarfor one who wishes to take heedlahūit belongs to Him
The closingTwo occurrences of arādawilla-fa-lā taʿqilūnreason

The same root, put to two different tasks in two sūras: al-Furqān reports an opportunity, al-Muʾminūn an ownership.

And lahū has been brought forward (taqdīm), and this must be recorded: in Arabic the fronting of the predicate reports specification — "it belongs to Him alone".

أَفَلَا تَعْقِلُونَ — the first of three questions

The root ع-ق-ل: to bind. ʿIqāl — the cord that binds a camel's knee; ʿaql — the bond that holds a person from swerving. The root was treated at Yāsīn 36/62 and al-Baqara 2/44.

And this question is the herald of the sūra's series of three questions between verses eighty-four and eighty-nine. There three separate closings will come: a-fa-lā tadhakkarūn (85), a-fa-lā tattaqūn (87), fa-annā tusḥarūn (89).

The four closings must be recorded together:

VerseClosingWhat it calls to
80a-fa-lā taʿqilūnTo binding — reason
85a-fa-lā tadhakkarūnTo remembering
87a-fa-lā tattaqūnTo guarding oneself
89fa-annā tusḥarūnNot a call but a finding — how are you bewitched

This series can be verified from the text, and I interpret it as my own reading: the three calls descend from reason to remembering, from remembering to guarding; the fourth is not a call but a finding. The series closes not with a question but with an astonishment.


23/81-83

بَلْ قَالُوا۟ مِثْلَ مَا قَالَ ٱلْأَوَّلُونَ · قَالُوٓا۟ أَءِذَا مِتْنَا وَكُنَّا تُرَابًا وَعِظَٰمًا أَءِنَّا لَمَبْعُوثُونَ · لَقَدْ وُعِدْنَا نَحْنُ وَءَابَآؤُنَا هَٰذَا مِن قَبْلُ إِنْ هَٰذَآ إِلَّآ أَسَٰطِيرُ ٱلْأَوَّلِينَ

bal qālū mithla mā qāla'l-awwalūn · qālū a-idhā mitnā wa kunnā turāban wa ʿiẓāman a-innā la-mabʿūthūn · laqad wuʿidnā naḥnu wa ābāʾunā hādhā min qablu in hādhā illā asāṭīru'l-awwalīn

"No — they said the same as those before them said: 'When we are dead and have become dust and bones, are we then to be raised? We were promised this before, we and our forefathers. This is nothing but the tales of the ancients.'"

بَلْ قَالُوا۟ مِثْلَ مَا قَالَ ٱلْأَوَّلُونَ — the sūra's own diagnosis

And this is one of the most striking sentences of the sūra, because the text names the work it is itself doing.

In the thirty-fifth verse an unnamed people had said: a-yaʿidukum annakum idhā mittum wa kuntum turāban wa ʿiẓāman annakum mukhrajūn.

In the eighty-second verse those addressed say: a-idhā mitnā wa kunnā turāban wa ʿiẓāman a-innā la-mabʿūthūn.

The two sentences can be compared:

23/3523/82
WhoThe notables of an unnamed peopleThose addressed
The patterna-yaʿidukuman objection in the third person ("does he promise you")a-idhā mitnāthe first person ("when we die")
The shared wordingidhā mittum wa kuntum turāban wa ʿiẓāmanidhā mitnā wa kunnā turāban wa ʿiẓāman
The last wordmukhrajūnbrought outmabʿūthūnraised

The shared portion is word for word. And the sūra says so openly in the eighty-first verse: bal qālū mithla mā qāla'l-awwalūn.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this exact overlap: the sūra repeats here, in the mouths of those it addresses, a sentence it placed forty-seven verses earlier in the mouth of a people and itself notes the repetition. The text, that is, does not merely tell the narrative as an example — it also itself establishes the overlap between the example and the present situation.

أَسَٰطِيرُ ٱلْأَوَّلِين

The root س-ط-ر: to write line by line, to set in rows. Saṭr — a line, a row; asṭār — lines. Asāṭīr — counted the plural of usṭūra: stories strung together and told.

The root was treated at al-Qamar 54/53 (wa kullu ṣaghīrin wa kabīrin mustaṭar) in comparison with ز-ب-ر and worked out at al-Qalam 68/1 (wa'l-qalami wa mā yasṭurūn). I do not repeat it here.

And the construction occurred word for word at al-Furqān 25/5: wa qālū asāṭīru'l-awwalīna'ktatabahā fa-hiya tumlā ʿalayhi bukratan wa aṣīlā. And it was tabulated there as the second of four objections.

The two verses can be compared:

al-Furqān 25/5al-Muʾminūn 23/83
What it is said ofThe Qurʾān — its compilation is describedThe promise of resurrection
Additioniktatabahā fa-hiya tumlā ʿalayhthe claim of dictationNone
What precedesifkun'ftarāhthe claim of inventionlaqad wuʿidnā naḥnu wa ābāʾunāits age

The same construction, aimed at two different targets.

And the distribution of the word al-awwalīn across the sūra must be recorded: 24 (ābāʾinā'l-awwalīn), 68 (ābāʾahumu'l-awwalīn), 81 (al-awwalūn), 83 (asāṭīru'l-awwalīn). Four occurrences, all about "those who came before".

I record this as an observation: the other side uses awwalīn as a proof (24, 83); the sūra uses it as a diagnosis (68, 81). The same word, in two different offices.

لَقَدْ وُعِدْنَا نَحْنُ وَءَابَآؤُنَا هَٰذَا مِن قَبْلُ

The logic of the objection must be recorded: the age of the promise is counted the proof that it will not come about.

I give this as an observation: the same ground was used the other way round in the twenty-fourth verse — there its being unheard of was the fault, here its having been heard many times is the fault.

VerseGroundWhat it rests on
24mā samiʿnā bi-hādhā fī ābāʾinā'l-awwalīnRejected because it is new
83laqad wuʿidnā naḥnu wa ābāʾunā hādhā min qablRejected because it is old

The two grounds are the opposite of one another, and both are inside the sūra. This is a contrast that can be verified from the text, and I interpret it as my own reading: the refusal takes its ground from the circumstances — the ground changes, the refusal does not. This is the same as the finding recorded at al-Furqān 25/4-8.


23/84-89

23/84-89 — Three questions, three answers

qul li-mani'l-arḍu wa man fīhā in kuntum taʿlamūn · sa-yaqūlūna li'llāh, qul a-fa-lā tadhakkarūn · qul man rabbu'l-samāwāti'l-sabʿi wa rabbu'l-ʿarshi'l-ʿaẓīm · sa-yaqūlūna li'llāh, qul a-fa-lā tattaqūn · qul man bi-yadihī malakūtu kulli shayʾin wa huwa yujīru wa lā yujāru ʿalayhi in kuntum taʿlamūn · sa-yaqūlūna li'llāh, qul fa-annā tusḥarūn

قُل لِّمَنِ ٱلْأَرْضُ وَمَن فِيهَآ إِن كُنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ · سَيَقُولُونَ لِلَّهِ قُلْ أَفَلَا تَذَكَّرُونَ · قُلْ مَن رَّبُّ ٱلسَّمَٰوَٰتِ ٱلسَّبْعِ وَرَبُّ ٱلْعَرْشِ ٱلْعَظِيمِ · سَيَقُولُونَ لِلَّهِ قُلْ أَفَلَا تَتَّقُونَ · قُلْ مَنۢ بِيَدِهِۦ مَلَكُوتُ كُلِّ شَىْءٍ وَهُوَ يُجِيرُ وَلَا يُجَارُ عَلَيْهِ إِن كُنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ · سَيَقُولُونَ لِلَّهِ قُلْ فَأَنَّىٰ تُسْحَرُونَ

"Say: 'To whom belong the earth and all in it, if you have knowledge?' They will say: 'To God.' Say: 'Will you not then take heed?' Say: 'Who is the Lord of the seven heavens and the Lord of the mighty throne?' They will say: 'God.' Say: 'Will you not then guard yourselves?' Say: 'In whose hand is the dominion of everything, who protects and against whom no one is protected, if you have knowledge?' They will say: 'God.' Say: 'How then are you bewitched?'"

The structure of the block — three tiers, one pattern

Six verses make up three equal steps. Each step is in four parts, and this can be verified from the text:

StepQuestionAnswerThe response
1 (84-85)li-mani'l-arḍu wa man fīhāownershipli'llāha-fa-lā tadhakkarūn
2 (86-87)man rabbu'l-samāwāti'l-sabʿlordshipli'llāha-fa-lā tattaqūn
3 (88-89)man bi-yadihī malakūtu kulli shayʾdominionli'llāhfa-annā tusḥarūn

And there is a widening across the three questions, and I record this as my own reading, its ground being the objects of the questions:

One. The scope grows: the earth → the seven heavens and the throne → everything.

Two. The form of the question changes: the first is li-man (to whom does it belong), the second and third man (who). The first asks about ownership, that is, the others about identity.

Three. The responses descend: taking heed → guarding oneself → astonishment. Together with the a-fa-lā taʿqilūn of 23/80 this makes four steps, and it was tabulated there.

سَيَقُولُونَ لِلَّهِ — the variant reading

And here is the best known variant reading of the sūra.

VerseThe common readingThe other reading
85sa-yaqūlūna li'llāh— (agreed)
87sa-yaqūlūna li'llāhsa-yaqūlūna Allāh
89sa-yaqūlūna li'llāhsa-yaqūlūna Allāh

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. And the grammatical ground of the difference must be recorded, because the disagreement arises precisely from it:

In the eighty-fourth verse the question is in the pattern li-man (to whom does it belong); the answer matching that wording is li'llāh (to God). In the eighty-sixth and eighty-eighth verses the question is in the pattern man (who); the answer matching that wording is Allāh.

Hence:

ReadingIts ground
Allāh (87, 89)Matching the wording — a man question is answered with Allāh
li'llāh (87, 89)Matching the sense — since all three questions do the same work, the answer is unified

Both grounds are recorded by the lexicographers. It is transmitted that in the script of the muṣḥaf the spelling li'llāh stands in these verses, and that both readings are counted compatible with that script; I do not go into the detail.

مَلَكُوت — the pattern

The root م-ل-ك: to possess, to rule. Mulk — sovereignty; malik — sovereign; malakūtthe widest form of sovereignty.

The lexicographers dwell on the ending -ūt: in Arabic this ending, seen in words such as raḥamūt, rahabūt and jabarūt, reports intensification. I pass this explanation on as it is transmitted.

The word occurs in four places in the Qurʾān: al-Anʿām 6/75, al-Aʿrāf 7/185, Yā-Sīn 36/83 (treated in Yāsīn), and this verse.

And at Yāsīn 36/83 (fa-subḥāna'lladhī bi-yadihī malakūtu kulli shayʾ) almost exactly the same construction occurs:

PlaceSentence
Yāsīn 36/83fa-subḥāna'lladhī bi-yadihī malakūtu kulli shayʾin wa ilayhi turjaʿūn
al-Muʾminūn 23/88man bi-yadihī malakūtu kulli shayʾin wa huwa yujīru…

The shared portion is word for word. And the difference must be recorded: in Yā-Sīn the construction stands inside a sentence of glorification, here inside a question. The same expression, once a verdict and once a question.

And in Yāsīn it was recorded that that verse is the last verse of the sūra. I rely on that treatment.

وَهُوَ يُجِيرُ وَلَا يُجَارُ عَلَيْهِ — an Arabian institution

The root ج-و-ر: to be side by side, to be a neighbour; and to swerve (to slip aside from the road). Jār — neighbour; ijārataking someone under one's protection.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series.

And the verb here points to a historical institution, and this must be recorded: in the society into which the Qurʾān was revealed, jiwār (protection) was an established practice. A tribe or a man of influence would take under his protection someone who sought refuge with him, and that person was inviolable. The protecting party was called mujīr, the protected one jār.

And the institution had two sides: the one giving protection could guard the person under his protection; but a stronger man could break that protection.

The verse negates precisely this second side: wa lā yujāru ʿalayh"no protection can be given against Him."

I give this as an entry of historical background, and its ground is the institution itself: the sentence uses a legal relation from the daily life of the one addressed. And it removes exactly the limit of that relation. I give the explanation resting on the known working of the institution.

The same word occurs at al-Jinn 72/22 as well (lā yujīranī mina'llāhi aḥad; treated in al-Jinn) and at al-Aḥqāf 46/31-32 (treated in al-Aḥqāf).

فَأَنَّىٰ تُسْحَرُونَ

And the block closes not with a question but with an astonishment.

Annā — "how, from where". In Arabic this particle carries both "how" and "from where", and the lexicographers record both.

The root س-ح-ر: to make a thing appear other than it is, to deceive. The lexicographers record the root's link with saḥar (the last part of the night — the hour at which night and day are mingled and not told apart). And saḥr — the region of the lungs and liver; the word is said to be derived from this as well.

The root was treated at al-Qamar 54/2 (siḥrun mustamirr) and at al-Muddaththir 74/24 (in hādhā illā siḥrun yuʾthar).

And the voice of the verb must be recorded: tusḥarūn — passive. "How are you bewitched" — the one who bewitches is not named.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the passive voice: the sentence points to no agent. And the sūra had done this before: bal qulūbuhum fī ghamratin (63) — there too what surrounds them was not named.

And the logic of the sentence is worth recording: all three questions have been answered correctly. The astonishment, that is, arises not from ignorance but from the mismatch between what is known and what is done. This can be verified from the build of the three steps.


23/90-92

بَلْ أَتَيْنَٰهُم بِٱلْحَقِّ وَإِنَّهُمْ لَكَٰذِبُونَ · مَا ٱتَّخَذَ ٱللَّهُ مِن وَلَدٍ وَمَا كَانَ مَعَهُۥ مِنْ إِلَٰهٍ إِذًا لَّذَهَبَ كُلُّ إِلَٰهٍۭ بِمَا خَلَقَ وَلَعَلَا بَعْضُهُمْ عَلَىٰ بَعْضٍ سُبْحَٰنَ ٱللَّهِ عَمَّا يَصِفُونَ · عَٰلِمِ ٱلْغَيْبِ وَٱلشَّهَٰدَةِ فَتَعَٰلَىٰ عَمَّا يُشْرِكُونَ

bal ataynāhum bi'l-ḥaqqi wa innahum la-kādhibūn · ma'ttakhadha'llāhu min waladin wa mā kāna maʿahū min ilāhin idhan la-dhahaba kullu ilāhin bimā khalaqa wa la-ʿalā baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍ, subḥāna'llāhi ʿammā yaṣifūn · ʿālimi'l-ghaybi wa'l-shahādati fa-taʿālā ʿammā yushrikūn

"No — We brought them the truth, and they are liars. God has not taken a child, nor is there any god with Him. Had it been so, each god would have gone off with what he created, and some of them would have risen over others. God is far above what they describe. He knows the unseen and the seen; He is exalted above what they associate with Him."

How the hypothetical proof is built

The proof works in this way: more than one god is supposed, and then the consequence of that supposition itself is shown.

And the consequence is given in two sentences:

ConsequenceExpressionWhat it reports
1la-dhahaba kullu ilāhin bimā khalaqaSeparation — each takes off what he created
2wa la-ʿalā baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍConflict — one rises over another

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the order of the two sentences: first division, then the attempt to set up a hierarchy. The two together mean the disappearance of an order.

And its pairing with the proof in the seventy-first verse must be recorded:

VerseHypothetical conditionConsequenceThe word
71lawi'ttabaʿa'l-ḥaqqu ahwāʾahumla-fasadati'l-samāwātu wa'l-arḍFasād — ruin
91wa mā kāna maʿahū min ilāhla-dhahaba kullu ilāhin … wa la-ʿalā baʿḍuhumDhahāb and ʿuluww — going off, and rising above

Two proofs, in the same sūra, on the same pattern. This is a pairing that can be verified within the sūra. And it was recorded at the seventy-first verse: the sūra builds two hypothetical proofs — one by way of hawā, the other by way of multiplicity.

وَلَعَلَا بَعْضُهُمْ عَلَىٰ بَعْضٍ

The root ع-ل-و was treated at the forty-sixth verse, and its three occurrences were tabulated there (46, 91, 116). What belongs here is this: in the forty-sixth verse Pharaoh's company were qawman ʿālīn. Here the same verb is used of the supposed gods.

I record this as an observation: the same root, once for human beings rising over one another, once for supposed gods rising over one another. And in the hundred and sixteenth verse the same root will be used of God, as taʿālā.

سُبْحَٰنَ ٱللَّهِ عَمَّا يَصِفُونَ and فَتَعَٰلَىٰ عَمَّا يُشْرِكُونَ

Two sentences come one after the other, and their structures are the same: [a word of tanzīh] + ʿammā + [an imperfect verb].

VerseThe word of tanzīhVerbFrom what
91subḥāna'llāhyaṣifūnthey describeDescribing
92fa-taʿālāyushrikūnthey associateAssociating

The second sentence comes with fa — that is, as the consequence of the first. And the verbs differ: one is speech (describing), the other act (associating).

A counterpart of these two sentences was treated in al-Ṣāffāt (37/159subḥāna'llāhi ʿammā yaṣifūn; 37/180subḥāna rabbika rabbi'l-ʿizzati ʿammā yaṣifūn), where it was recorded that the second is an extension of the first. I rely on that treatment.

The difference here must be recorded: in al-Ṣāffāt both sentences ended with yaṣifūn; in al-Muʾminūn the second turns to yushrikūn. The move, that is, is from speech to act.

عَٰلِمِ ٱلْغَيْبِ وَٱلشَّهَٰدَة

The construction occurs regularly in the Qurʾān: al-Anʿām 6/73, al-Tawba 9/94 and 9/105, al-Raʿd 13/9, al-Sajda 32/6 (it occurred in al-Sajda), al-Zumar 39/46 (it occurred in al-Zumar), al-Ḥashr 59/22 (treated in al-Ḥashr), al-Taghābun 64/18 (treated in al-Taghābun), al-Jumuʿa 62/8 (it occurred in al-Jumuʿa).

The root غ-ي-ب: to disappear from sight, to be veiled. The root ش-ه-د: to be present, to see, to bear witness.

And the work of the construction must be recorded, and I give this as my own reading, its ground being the opposition of the two words: the pair covers the whole of what is known. Knowledge, that is, is not confined to one field.

And the lexicographers differ over its parsing: if ʿālimi is read in the genitive it is an adjective to the name Allāh in the preceding verse; if in the nominative it is the predicate of a new sentence. Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

The close of block VII

The block from seventy-eight to ninety-two is a whole, and its order is worth recording:

VerseWhat
78-80Three proofs — the organs, the scattering, life and death
81-83The objection — and the finding that the objection is old
84-89Three questions, three answers — what is accepted is enumerated
90-92The conclusion — the denial of a child and of a partner

I give this as my own reading: the block proceeds from what the one addressed accepts. In all three questions the answer is given from their own mouths (sa-yaqūlūna li'llāh). And the conclusion is drawn out of those answers. The proof, that is, brings in no knowledge from outside — it carries the addressee's own admission through to the end.


23/93-95

قُل رَّبِّ إِمَّا تُرِيَنِّى مَا يُوعَدُونَ · رَبِّ فَلَا تَجْعَلْنِى فِى ٱلْقَوْمِ ٱلظَّٰلِمِينَ · وَإِنَّا عَلَىٰٓ أَن نُّرِيَكَ مَا نَعِدُهُمْ لَقَٰدِرُونَ

qul rabbi immā turiyannī mā yūʿadūn · rabbi fa-lā tajʿalnī fi'l-qawmi'l-ẓālimīn · wa innā ʿalā an nuriyaka mā naʿiduhum la-qādirūn

"Say: 'My Lord, if You should show me what they are promised — my Lord, then do not place me among the wrongdoing people.' We are certainly able to show you what We promise them."

How the prayer is built

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the two verses: the prayer is conditional (immā turiyannī), and what is asked for is not that it should not be shown.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the apodosis of the conditional clause: the answer is not fa-lā turinī (do not show me) — it is fa-lā tajʿalnī fi'l-qawmi'l-ẓālimīn (do not place me among them). The prayer asks, that is, not about the event but about the position at the moment of the event.

إِمَّا — its original is in (the conditional) + (redundant, reinforcing). And the doubled nūn at the end of the verb (turiyanna) is the heavy nūn of emphasis: the condition is reinforced once more. The condition, that is, is stressed twice — by the particle and by the ending of the verb.

رَبِّرَبِّ — the repetition of the vocative

And the word order must be recorded: the vocative rabbi occurs twice — once at the head of the conditional clause (93), once at the head of the apodosis (94).

The lexicographers explain this repetition as taḍarruʿ (the intensifying of the entreaty); I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted. And the repetition marks the verse boundary too: two separate verses are the two halves of a single sentence.

The chain of prayers in the sūra

And this is the first link of a chain that begins in the sūra's last block:

VersePrayerWhat is asked
93-94rabbi fa-lā tajʿalnī fi'l-qawmi'l-ẓālimīnPosition — not to be among them
97rabbi aʿūdhu bika min hamazāti'l-shayāṭīnProtection — from promptings
98wa aʿūdhu bika rabbi an yaḥḍurūnProtection — from their being present
118rabbi'ghfir wa'rḥam wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīnForgiveness and mercy

All four prayers begin with the vocative rabbi. And the last verse of the sūra is the last link of this chain. This is a series that can be verified from the text.


23/96

ٱدْفَعْ بِٱلَّتِى هِىَ أَحْسَنُ ٱلسَّيِّئَةَ نَحْنُ أَعْلَمُ بِمَا يَصِفُونَ

idfaʿ bi'llatī hiya aḥsanu'l-sayyiʾa, naḥnu aʿlamu bimā yaṣifūn

"Repel the evil with what is best. We know best what they describe."

The word order of the sentence

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the verse: the object (al-sayyiʾa) has been thrown to the end. The normal order would be idfaʿi'l-sayyiʾata bi'llatī hiya aḥsan.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being this postponement: the sentence says first how it is to be repelled, and then what is to be repelled. The emphasis, that is, is on the instrument, not on what is met.

بِٱلَّتِى هِىَ أَحْسَن — the qualified noun left unsaid

The construction is a relative clause, and the noun it qualifies has been elided. The lexicographers usually supply it as bi'l-khaṣlati'llatī hiya aḥsan (with the quality that is best) or bi'l-dafʿati'llatī hiya aḥsan.

And the elision itself is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: the verse does not say what is to be done. It sets only a measure: aḥsan — that which is best. For this reason the command does not give a list of behaviours; it gives a measure to be worked out afresh in each case.

The same sentence occurs in a fuller form at Fuṣṣilat 41/34: idfaʿ bi'llatī hiya aḥsanu fa-idhā'lladhī baynaka wa baynahū ʿadāwatun ka-annahū waliyyun ḥamīm.

The two verses can be compared:

Fuṣṣilat 41/34al-Muʾminūn 23/96
What precedeswa lā tastawi'l-ḥasanatu wa lā'l-sayyiʾathey are not equalwa innā ʿalā an nuriyaka… (95) — a statement of power
What followsfa-idhā'lladhī baynaka wa baynahū ʿadāwatun…an outcome is reportednaḥnu aʿlamu bimā yaṣifūnknowledge is reported
What is promisedThe turning of enmity into friendshipNothing

The difference is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: Fuṣṣilat promises an outcome along with the command; al-Muʾminūn promises no outcome. In its place it says naḥnu aʿlamu"We know."

The ground of the command here, that is, is not the expectation that the other side will change; it is the knowledge that what is said is on record.

نَحْنُ أَعْلَمُ بِمَا يَصِفُون

And the construction comes from the same root (و-ص-ف) as ʿammā yaṣifūn in the ninety-first verse. There are four verses between the two.

VerseSentenceAbout whom
91subḥāna'llāhi ʿammā yaṣifūnThe descriptions given of God
96naḥnu aʿlamu bimā yaṣifūnThe same descriptions — it is reported that they are known

The same verb, with two different responses: one tanzīh, the other knowledge. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.


23/97-98

وَقُل رَّبِّ أَعُوذُ بِكَ مِنْ هَمَزَٰتِ ٱلشَّيَٰطِينِ · وَأَعُوذُ بِكَ رَبِّ أَن يَحْضُرُونِ

wa qul rabbi aʿūdhu bika min hamazāti'l-shayāṭīn · wa aʿūdhu bika rabbi an yaḥḍurūn

"And say: 'My Lord, I take refuge with You from the promptings of the satans. And I take refuge with You, my Lord, from their being present with me.'"

Two acts of taking refuge — and the difference between them

The word order must be recorded, and this is the core of the two verses: aʿūdhu bika is repeated twice, and the second taking of refuge is not the continuation of the first but something different from it.

VerseWhat refuge is taken fromHow concrete
97hamazāti'l-shayāṭīntheir promptingsAn act
98an yaḥḍurūntheir being presentTheir mere presence

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the object of the second taking of refuge: the second request asks protection not from an act but from being present. The taking of refuge, that is, draws back a step: not only from the effect but from the nearness as well.

هَمَزَات — root: ه-م-ز

The root was worked out in al-Humaza. I do not repeat it here. The description given there:

همز — root ه-م-ز. Its primary sense in the dictionary is to press, to squeeze, to break, to prod. To press down on a thing and crush it. The name of the letter hamza in the Arabic alphabet comes from this as well: a sound produced by a constriction and a break in the throat.

I rely on that treatment. What belongs here is that the word is plural and a verbal noun.

Hamazāt — the plural of hamza; the plural of a maṣdar marra (a single instance of the act). The word reports individual prods, that is, not a continuous state.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being this form of the pattern: what refuge is taken from is not a siege but prods that come one at a time. And the sense "to press down and crush" recorded in al-Humaza gives the picture of a prod that has a place in the body — light, but a physical contact.

أَن يَحْضُرُون — the absence of a passive

The root ح-ض-ر: to be present, to be at hand. Ḥāḍir — the one present; muḥḍar — the one brought.

The root was treated in three places in al-Ṣāffāt (37/57, 127, 158), where it was tabulated that the pattern is used in opposite directions. I rely on that treatment.

And the nūn at the end of the verb must be recorded: an yaḥḍurūn — its original is an yaḥḍurūni; the final yāʾ (the first-person pronoun) has been dropped to fit the verse-ending. The same operation will be seen at the ninety-ninth verse (irjiʿūn) and at the hundred and eighth (lā tukallimūn).

This is a pattern of sound repeated in the last section of the sūra, and it can be verified from the text.

The place of the two verses within the sūra

And an entry on context: the ninety-sixth verse was a command turned outward (idfaʿ — repel). The ninety-seventh and ninety-eighth are two prayers turned inward.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the order of the two verses: immediately after the command to repel evil with what is best, two protections are asked for the one who does the repelling. While the command is given, that is, the risk to the one who carries it out is named as well.


23/99-100

حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا جَآءَ أَحَدَهُمُ ٱلْمَوْتُ قَالَ رَبِّ ٱرْجِعُونِ · لَعَلِّىٓ أَعْمَلُ صَٰلِحًا فِيمَا تَرَكْتُ كَلَّآ إِنَّهَا كَلِمَةٌ هُوَ قَآئِلُهَا وَمِن وَرَآئِهِم بَرْزَخٌ إِلَىٰ يَوْمِ يُبْعَثُونَ

ḥattā idhā jāʾa aḥadahumu'l-mawtu qāla rabbi'rjiʿūn · laʿallī aʿmalu ṣāliḥan fīmā taraktu, kallā, innahā kalimatun huwa qāʾiluhā, wa min warāʾihim barzakhun ilā yawmi yubʿathūn

"Until, when death comes to one of them, he says: 'My Lord, send me back — that I may do a righteous deed in what I have left behind!' No. It is a word he speaks, no more. And behind them is a barrier until the day they are raised."

حَتَّىٰٓ إِذَا — the third turn

It was tabulated at the sixty-fourth verse: the pattern occurs three times in the sūra (64, 77, 99). This is the third and the most final of them — because the others tell of a punishment, this one tells of death.

رَبِّ ٱرْجِعُونِ — a plural imperative

And this is the most disputed place in the verse: the address is singular (rabbi — "my Lord"), the imperative plural (irjiʿūn — "send me back", addressed to more than one).

The lexicographers explain this mismatch in several ways:

ReadingExplanation
1A plural of respect (taʿẓīm) — in Arabic the plural is used for honour
2A plural for repetition — it stands in place of saying "send me back, send me back, send me back"
3Rabbi is a vocative; irjiʿūn is addressed to the angels — to those who take the soul
4The words are spoken in a moment of bewilderment, out of order

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

And the nūn at the end of the verb arises, as recorded at the ninety-eighth verse, from the dropping of the first-person yāʾ: its original is irjiʿūnī.

لَعَلِّىٓ أَعْمَلُ صَٰلِحًا فِيمَا تَرَكْتُ

Fīmā taraktu — "in what I have left". The lexicographers differ over the construction:

ReadingWhat mā taraktu is
1The property he left behind — to do good with it
2The works he left undone — what he neglected
3The world he has left — in general

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

كَلَّا إِنَّهَا كَلِمَةٌ هُوَ قَآئِلُهَا

كَلَّا — a particle of rejection and rebuke. The lexicographers explain the word as "no, it is not so" and record that in the Qurʾān it mostly occurs in the rejection of a request or a claim. The word was treated in al-Qiyāma, ʿAbasa and al-Takāthur.

إِنَّهَا كَلِمَةٌ هُوَ قَآئِلُهَا — the lexicographers differ over the sense of the sentence:

ReadingMeaning
1"This is only a word he speaks" — that is, it has no effect, an empty word
2"He will go on saying it" — the active participle qāʾiluhā reports continuance
3"This word tells against him" — saying it does not lift the responsibility

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

And the word order must be recorded: huwa qāʾiluhāa nominal sentence and an active participle. Had a verb been used (yaqūluhā) it would have reported a single act; the active participle reports that the word has stuck to the one who says it. I give this as an observation about the word order.

وَمِن وَرَآئِهِم بَرْزَخٌ إِلَىٰ يَوْمِ يُبْعَثُونَ

And this sentence must be treated separately.

بَرْزَخ — and a comparison with al-Furqān 25/53

The word was worked out at al-Furqān 25/53. The description given there:

بَرْزَخthe screen between two things, an intervening zone. The lexicographers state that the word is a separator that comes between two things and keeps them from mingling.

And it had occurred at al-Raḥmān 55/20 as well (baynahumā barzakhun lā yabghiyān). I rely on that treatment.

The word occurs in three places in the Qurʾān, and the three must be compared:

PlaceSentenceBetween whatKind
al-Raḥmān 55/20baynahumā barzakhun lā yabghiyānTwo waters — sweet and saltA barrier in space
al-Furqān 25/53wa jaʿala baynahumā barzakhan wa ḥijran maḥjūrāTwo watersA barrier in space
al-Muʾminūn 23/100wa min warāʾihim barzakhun ilā yawmi yubʿathūnDeath and resurrectionA barrier in time

The same word: in the first two a barrier in space, in the third a barrier in time. This is a difference that can be verified from the three texts.

And the wording that marks the difference must be recorded: ilā yawmi yubʿathūn — "until the day they are raised". In al-Furqān and al-Raḥmān the barrier had no end date; here it has one.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this difference of particle (bayna / ilā): the barrier between the two waters stands between two sides and is without term; the barrier here lasts up to a time. The word does the same work, that is — it prevents passage — but its measure changes.

A methodological note — on life in the barzakh

And a limit must be set here, and I record it plainly:

Under this verse I build no description of the character of life in the barzakh. On the state of the grave, the condition of souls, what happens there, I transmit no report and I do not speculate.

I stay within the wording of the verse, and the verse says three things:

#WhatThe wording
1There is a barrierBarzakh
2It is behind themmin warāʾihim
3It lasts until a timeilā yawmi yubʿathūn

Beyond this the verse gives no information. The rules recorded in Method — "do not ascribe a saying you are not sure of" and "do not present your own inference as a transmitted report" — are applied here exactly.

The lexicographers enter a note on the construction min warāʾihim, and I pass it on: warāʾ in Arabic can mean both behind and in front — so it can also be read "before them". Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference.

The request "send me back" — a comparison with three verses across this series

The same request was treated in two other places in this series, and the two were tabulated at al-Sajda 32/12. The third is here, and I extend the table:

Fāṭir 35/37al-Sajda 32/12al-Muʾminūn 23/99-100
The verbakhrijnābring us outirjiʿnāsend us backirjiʿūnsend me back (plural)
Where it is saidInside the Fireyaṣṭarikhūna fīhāIn the presenceʿinda rabbihimAt the moment of deathjāʾa aḥadahumu'l-mawt
Who says itA group — pluralA group — pluralA single personaḥadahum
For whatnaʿmal ṣāliḥan ghayra'lladhī kunnā naʿmalnaʿmal ṣāliḥan innā mūqinūnaʿmalu ṣāliḥan fīmā taraktu
The answer givena-wa-lam nuʿammirkum…a term had been givenNo answer — verse 13 says something elsekallāa direct refusal
What followsfa-mā li'l-ẓālimīna min naṣīrwa law shiʾnā la-ātaynā kulla nafsin hudāhāBarzakh — a barrier is reported

All three requests ask for the same act: naʿmal ṣāliḥan / aʿmalu ṣāliḥan. This is an overlap that can be verified from the three texts.

And the finding recorded in al-Sajda goes one step further here. What was written there was this:

The request in Fāṭir puts forward the mending of deeds, the request in al-Sajda puts forward knowledge. Both make a ground of what is claimed to have been lacking in this world — and both grounds are invalidated by the verse itself.

I record al-Muʾminūn's difference as my own reading, its ground being the table above:

One. A difference of time. The requests in Fāṭir and al-Sajda are spoken in the hereafter. The request in al-Muʾminūn is at the moment of death — that is, at the earliest point.

Two. A difference of number. The others are from the mouth of a group; this one from the mouth of a single person (aḥadahum).

Three. The form of the answer. Fāṭir gives a ground ("a term had been given"), al-Sajda shifts the answer elsewhere, al-Muʾminūn refuses in a single word: kallā.

Four. And only al-Muʾminūn reports a barrier. In the other two verses the reason why there will be no return was explained by a ground; here a structure is set down: the barzakh.

And this request will return once more within the sūra, in the hundred and seventh verse: rabbanā akhrijnā minhā. In the same sūra, that is, the request is made twice — once at the moment of death, once inside the Fire. Both are refused. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra, and it will be treated separately at the hundred and seventh verse.


23/101

فَإِذَا نُفِخَ فِى ٱلصُّورِ فَلَآ أَنسَابَ بَيْنَهُمْ يَوْمَئِذٍ وَلَا يَتَسَآءَلُونَ

fa-idhā nufikha fi'l-ṣūri fa-lā ansāba baynahum yawmaʾidhin wa lā yatasāʾalūn

"When the trumpet is blown, on that day there will be no ties of kinship between them, nor will they ask after one another."

نُفِخَ فِى ٱلصُّور

The root ن-ف-خ: to blow. صُور — the horn that is blown, the trumpet.

The word and the matter were treated at al-Nāziʿāt 79/6-7, al-Ḥāqqa 69/13 and Yāsīn 36/51. I do not repeat it here.

And the passive of the verb must be recorded: nufikha — the one who blows is not named. The same point was recorded in al-Nāziʿāt.

فَلَآ أَنسَابَ بَيْنَهُمْ — and a comparison with al-Furqān 25/54

The root ن-س-ب: to attach a thing to an origin. Nasab — a tie of descent; nisba — a relation.

The word was treated at al-Furqān 25/54 (fa-jaʿalahū nasaban wa ṣihrā). What was recorded there:

Two ties must be recorded: nasabkinship that comes by birth; ṣihrkinship established by marriage. … the preceding verse described two waters that do not mingle; this verse describes two lines that join.

I rely on that treatment. And the two verses must be compared, because the same word is used in two opposite directions:

al-Furqān 25/54al-Muʾminūn 23/101
The sentencewa huwa'lladhī khalaqa mina'l-māʾi basharan fa-jaʿalahū nasaban wa ṣihrāfa-lā ansāba baynahum yawmaʾidhin
The verbjaʿalaHe establishedthere is none left
How many tiesTwonasab and ṣihrOne — only ansāb
NumberSingularnasabanPluralansāba
TimeIn this world — the discussion of creationyawmaʾidhin — on that day

The two verses must be read together, and I record this as my own reading, its ground being the use of the same word with two different verbs: al-Furqān says that the human being created from water is woven with ties of descent and of marriage — the ties, that is, are a part of the creation. al-Muʾminūn says that those same ties will be lifted on a day.

And it must be recorded: what is described is not the tie's ceasing to exist but its ceasing to work — indeed the verse continues wa lā yatasāʾalūn. The question, that is, is not the existence of the tie of kinship but the impossibility of asking anything by way of it.

And the ṣihr of al-Furqān is not named here. I give this as an entry about the wording.

وَلَا يَتَسَآءَلُونَ — and the disagreement with al-Ṣāffāt 37/27

The root س-أ-ل: to ask, to request. The pattern is Form VI (tasāʾala): to ask one another.

And the same verb occurs in the scenes of the resurrection in the Qurʾān both affirmed and negated:

PlaceSentenceWhat it says
al-Ṣāffāt 37/27wa aqbala baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍin yatasāʾalūnThey ask — in the Fire
al-Ṣāffāt 37/50fa-aqbala baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍin yatasāʾalūnThey ask — in the garden
al-Ṭūr 52/25wa aqbala baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍin yatasāʾalūnThey ask
al-Muddaththir 74/40fī jannātin yatasāʾalūnThey ask
al-Muʾminūn 23/101wa yatasāʾalūnThey do not ask

This makes an apparent contradiction, and the exegetes dwell on it. The explanations given are these:

#ExplanationGround
1Different times — at the moment the trumpet is blown they do not ask; afterwards they doThe verse sets the qualification yawmaʾidhin (on that day)
2Different contents — there is no asking for something by way of a tie of kinship; asking after one another there isThe sense of the verb tasāʾul as "requesting"
3Different parties — those who do not ask are some, those who ask are othersThe difference of setting

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference. And in al-Ṣāffāt it was recorded that the same verb is repeated in two tables (the Fire and the garden); I rely on that treatment.

A link within the sūra

And I record an observation: in the hundred and eleventh verse the sūra will describe the relation between the one who mocked and the one mocked; in the hundred and twelfth a question will be asked (kam labithtum). The state of "not asking" is therefore not absolute — indeed the sūra itself sets up a scene of speech a few verses later.

This is a datum within the sūra supporting the first explanation, and I record it as an observation; I do not impose a preference.


23/102-103

فَمَن ثَقُلَتْ مَوَٰزِينُهُۥ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ هُمُ ٱلْمُفْلِحُونَ · وَمَنْ خَفَّتْ مَوَٰزِينُهُۥ فَأُو۟لَٰٓئِكَ ٱلَّذِينَ خَسِرُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُمْ فِى جَهَنَّمَ خَٰلِدُونَ

fa-man thaqulat mawāzīnuhū fa-ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūn · wa man khaffat mawāzīnuhū fa-ulāʾika'lladhīna khasirū anfusahum fī jahannama khālidūn

"Those whose scales are heavy — those are the ones who attain deliverance. And those whose scales are light — those are the ones who have lost their own selves; in Hell they remain."

مَوَٰزِين — the word and the disagreement over it

The root و-ز-ن: to weigh. Mīzān — a balance; wazn — weight, weighing.

The word was treated in detail at al-Qāriʿa 101/6-9 (fa-ammā man thaqulat mawāzīnuh · wa ammā man khaffat mawāzīnuh), where it was recorded that it is joined with the dharra of al-Zilzāl. I do not repeat it here.

And this verse is almost a word-for-word repetition of the two verses in al-Qāriʿa:

PlaceHeavyLight
al-Qāriʿa 101/6-9fa-ammā man thaqulat mawāzīnuh fa-huwa fī ʿīshatin rāḍiyawa ammā man khaffat mawāzīnuh fa-ummuhū hāwiya
al-Muʾminūn 23/102-103fa-man thaqulat mawāzīnuhū fa-ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūnwa man khaffat mawāzīnuhū fa-ulāʾika'lladhīna khasirū anfusahum

The shared wording is word for word; what differs is the concluding sentences. This is an overlap that can be verified from the two texts.

And the difference must be recorded: al-Qāriʿa gives the outcome as a place (ʿīshatin rāḍiya / hāwiya); al-Muʾminūn gives it as a name (al-mufliḥūn / khasirū anfusahum).

ٱلْمُفْلِحُون — the return to the sūra's first verse

And here the clearest weave of the sūra is completed.

The root ف-ل-ح was treated at the first verse. The root's three occurrences in the sūra are these:

VerseSentenceMoodWho
1qad aflaḥa'l-muʾminūnPerfect — doneThe believers
102fa-ulāʾika humu'l-mufliḥūnActive participle — an attributeThose whose scales are heavy
117innahū lā yufliḥu'l-kāfirūnImperfect, negatedThe disbelievers

All three occurrences can be verified from the text. And I record this as my own reading, its ground being this threefold distribution:

The first verse gives the verdict — the believers have attained. The hundred and second shows how the verdict is to be understood — at the scales. The hundred and seventeenth sets down its negative.

The sūra, that is, attaches at its end the verdict it gave at its opening to a measure. And the measure is not the attributes enumerated in the first eleven verses — it is the scales.

And a distinction between falāḥ and fawz was recorded in al-Ḥashr:

Falāḥ was used in the ninth verse for those guarded against covetousness — that is, an inner working in this world. Fawz comes here, in the verse that reports the outcome. One names the process, the other the arrival.

I rely on that treatment. And both words are present in this sūra: falāḥ (1, 102, 117) and fawz (111 — annahum humu'l-fāʾizūn). The distinction drawn in al-Ḥashr, that is, can be tested in this sūra too: falāḥ stands at the two ends of the sūra and in the scene of the scales, fawz in the recompense of those who were patient.

خَسِرُوٓا۟ أَنفُسَهُم — the return to the thirty-fourth verse

The root خ-س-ر was treated at the thirty-fourth verse. There the other side had said: wa la-in aṭaʿtum basharan mithlakum innakum idhan la-khāsirūn.

VerseWho says itWho will come to loss
34The objectorsThose who follow the messenger
103The textThose whose scales are light

The same root, in two different mouths, with two opposite verdicts. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

And the object must be recorded: khasirū anfusahum — what is lost is not property but themselves.

I give this as an observation about the word order: in the thirty-fourth verse the object of the loss was not stated; here it is stated.


23/104-105

تَلْفَحُ وُجُوهَهُمُ ٱلنَّارُ وَهُمْ فِيهَا كَٰلِحُونَ · أَلَمْ تَكُنْ ءَايَٰتِى تُتْلَىٰ عَلَيْكُمْ فَكُنتُم بِهَا تُكَذِّبُونَ

talfaḥu wujūhahumu'l-nāru wa hum fīhā kāliḥūn · a-lam takun āyātī tutlā ʿalaykum fa-kuntum bihā tukadhdhibūn

"The Fire scorches their faces, and there they are drawn back in a grimace. 'Were My signs not recited to you? And you used to deny them.'"

تَلْفَحُ — root: ل-ف-ح

The concrete sense of the root: the striking of a flame or a hot wind against the face.

And the lexicographers record a difference of degree between lafḥ and nafḥ:

WordRootDegree
نَفْحن-ف-حA light breath, a slight touch
لَفْحل-ف-حA violent striking, a scorching

I pass this distinction on as it is transmitted.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series. The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

And the object of the verb must be recorded: wujūhahum — the faces. The face is the limb that comes regularly to the fore in the Qurʾān's tables of punishment and favour — it was treated at ʿAbasa 80/38-41 (wujūhun yawmaʾidhin musfira / ʿalayhā ghabara) and at al-Ghāshiya 88/2 and 88/8.

كَٰلِحُون — root: ك-ل-ح

The concrete sense of the root is given by the lexicographers as follows: the drawing back of the lips so that the teeth are left bare. Kalaḥa — his lips drew back and his teeth showed.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series. The word occurs only here in the Qurʾān.

And the picture in the word is worth recording: what is described is not an expression of pain — it is a state of the face. The lips have drawn back and the teeth have become visible.

I give this as an entry about the language and go no further. And the finding recorded at al-Furqān 25/12 holds here too: in these scenes the Qurʾān uses a detail that can be seen rather than an abstract adjective.

أَلَمْ تَكُنْ ءَايَٰتِى تُتْلَىٰ عَلَيْكُمْ — the return to the sixty-sixth verse

This sentence was treated at the sixty-sixth verse and tabulated there. In brief:

VersePatternWhere
66qad kānat āyātī tutlā ʿalaykuma statementIn this world
105a-lam takun āyātī tutlā ʿalaykuma questionIn the hereafter

And the verbs that follow also differ, and this must be recorded:

VerseThe reaction
66fa-kuntum ʿalā aʿqābikum tankiṣūndrawing back on the heels
105fa-kuntum bihā tukadhdhibūndenying

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the difference between the two verbs: the scene in this world described a behaviour (drawing back); the scene in the hereafter names the same thing as a verdict (denial).

The sūra, that is, gives the behaviour seen from outside its name at the end. This is a reading, and it is not binding.


23/106-107

قَالُوا۟ رَبَّنَا غَلَبَتْ عَلَيْنَا شِقْوَتُنَا وَكُنَّا قَوْمًا ضَآلِّينَ · رَبَّنَآ أَخْرِجْنَا مِنْهَا فَإِنْ عُدْنَا فَإِنَّا ظَٰلِمُونَ

qālū rabbanā ghalabat ʿalaynā shiqwatunā wa kunnā qawman ḍāllīn · rabbanā akhrijnā minhā fa-in ʿudnā fa-innā ẓālimūn

"They said: 'Our Lord, our wretchedness overcame us, and we were a people gone astray. Our Lord, bring us out of it. If we go back, then we are indeed wrongdoers.'"

غَلَبَتْ عَلَيْنَا شِقْوَتُنَا — the form of the excuse

The sentence is an excuse, and its build must be recorded: shiqwatunā is the subject, ʿalaynāthey are the object.

In the sentence, that is, the party doing the acting is not they but their own wretchedness.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this voice of the sentence: the excuse takes the responsibility off the person and gives it to a condition.

And the verse does not leave this to stand alone: immediately after comes wa kunnā qawman ḍāllīnand this time the subject is they themselves.

SentenceSubjectWhat
ghalabat ʿalaynā shiqwatunāWretchednessAn excuse — something from outside
wa kunnā qawman ḍāllīnWeAn admission — their own condition

Two sentences side by side, with different subjects. This is a fact that can be verified from the text, and I give it as an observation about the word order: in the same speech there is both an excuse and an admission.

The root ش-ق-و: hardship, distress, unhappiness. The word is the opposite of saʿāda (happiness). The root was treated at al-Aʿlā 87/11 (wa yatajannabuhā'l-ashqā) and at al-Layl 92/15 (lā yaṣlāhā illā'l-ashqā).

A variant reading must be recorded: the readings shiqwatunā and shaqāwatunā are transmitted. Two verbal-noun patterns from the same root; it does not change the meaning.

And the finding recorded in al-Layl holds here too: there too the word ashqā was set down not as a condition but as the outcome of deeds. I rely on that treatment. The assumption the excuse rests on — that wretchedness is a fate independent of the person — is thus not supported by the Qurʾān's own usage. I give this reading as my own reading.

رَبَّنَآ أَخْرِجْنَا مِنْهَا — the second request in the sūra

And this is the second form within the sūra of the request in the ninety-ninth verse.

VerseThe requestWhereThe answer
99rabbi'rjiʿūnsend me backAt the moment of deathkallā (100) — refusal
107rabbanā akhrijnā minhābring us outInside the Fireikhsaʾū fīhā (108) — refusal

The same sūra, the same request, two different times. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

And the request at Fāṭir 35/37 uses exactly the same word as this second one: rabbanā akhrijnā naʿmal ṣāliḥan. A four-row table was built at the ninety-ninth verse; this verse is added to that table as a fifth row.

And its difference must be recorded: the request in Fāṭir offered a ground, saying naʿmal ṣāliḥan (that we may do righteous deeds). The request here offers no ground — in its place it gives an undertaking: fa-in ʿudnā fa-innā ẓālimūn.

فَإِنْ عُدْنَا فَإِنَّا ظَٰلِمُونَ

The word order must be recorded: the sentence is a condition-and-answer structure and takes the form of an undertaking — "if we go back, we are wrongdoers."

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the mood of the sentence: the undertaking involves their own mouths naming their former condition as wrongdoing. There is a tension, that is, between the excuse (106) and the undertaking (107): one lifts the responsibility, the other accepts it.


23/108

قَالَ ٱخْسَـُٔوا۟ فِيهَا وَلَا تُكَلِّمُونِ

qāla'khsaʾū fīhā wa lā tukallimūn

"He said: 'Slink away into it, and do not speak to Me!'"

ٱخْسَـُٔوا۟ — root: خ-س-أ

The concrete sense of the root is given by the lexicographers as follows: khasaʾa'l-kalba — to drive off a dog, to send it away. And from this comes the sense of being driven off in humiliation. Khāsiʾ — driven off, cowering.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series. The word occurs in two places in the Qurʾān: al-Baqara 2/65 (kūnū qiradatan khāsiʾīn) and this verse. And at al-Mulk 67/4 the same root occurs in another pattern (yanqalib ilayka'l-baṣaru khāsiʾan wa huwa ḥasīr) — where it was used for the eye returning weary and without hope.

The word's three occurrences can be compared:

PlacePatternWho / what
al-Baqara 2/65khāsiʾīn — active participleA community
al-Mulk 67/4khāsiʾan — active participleThe eye — the return of the gaze
al-Muʾminūn 23/108ikhsaʾūan imperativeThose addressed

The same root: in two of them it reports a state, here a command.

And the harshness of the word must be recorded, and I give this as an entry about the language: the word is one used in Arabic for driving off an animal. The lexicographers record this, and I pass it on as it is transmitted.

وَلَا تُكَلِّمُونِ — the cutting off of speech

The root ك-ل-م: to wound; and to speak. The lexicographers record both senses together: kalm — a wound; kalām — speech. The link is drawn by way of speech too leaving a mark; I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted.

And the nūn at the end of the verb arises, as recorded at the ninety-eighth verse, from the dropping of the first-person yāʾ: its original is tukallimūnī.

And this completes a weave in the sūra's last block, and it must be recorded:

VerseSentenceWhat
99qāla rabbi'rjiʿūnSpeech begins — a request
107rabbanā akhrijnā minhāSpeech continues — a second request
108wa lā tukallimūnSpeech is cut off

All three verses can be verified from the text. And I record this as my own reading: the block carries through a speech that begins at the moment of death and closes it with a prohibition of speech. What is refused, that is, is not only the request but the voicing of the request.

And the finding recorded at the seventy-seventh verse goes one step further here: there, at the core of the word mublisūn, was finding nothing to say. Here there are words to be found, but no one left to address.


23/109-111

إِنَّهُۥ كَانَ فَرِيقٌ مِّنْ عِبَادِى يَقُولُونَ رَبَّنَآ ءَامَنَّا فَٱغْفِرْ لَنَا وَٱرْحَمْنَا وَأَنتَ خَيْرُ ٱلرَّٰحِمِينَ · فَٱتَّخَذْتُمُوهُمْ سِخْرِيًّا حَتَّىٰٓ أَنسَوْكُمْ ذِكْرِى وَكُنتُم مِّنْهُمْ تَضْحَكُونَ · إِنِّى جَزَيْتُهُمُ ٱلْيَوْمَ بِمَا صَبَرُوٓا۟ أَنَّهُمْ هُمُ ٱلْفَآئِزُونَ

innahū kāna farīqun min ʿibādī yaqūlūna rabbanā āmannā fa'ghfir lanā wa'rḥamnā wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīn · fa'ttakhadhtumūhum sikhriyyan ḥattā ansawkum dhikrī wa kuntum minhum taḍḥakūn · innī jazaytuhumu'l-yawma bimā ṣabarū annahum humu'l-fāʾizūn

"There was a party of My servants who used to say, 'Our Lord, we have believed; forgive us and have mercy on us, and You are the best of those who show mercy.' And you took them for mockery — until it made you forget My remembrance; and you used to laugh at them. Today I have recompensed them for their patience: it is they who are the ones who have won."

فَرِيقٌ مِّنْ عِبَادِى

The root ف-ر-ق: to separate. Farīq — a party set apart. The root was treated at al-Furqān 25/1 (al-Furqān) and at al-Dukhān 44/4.

And the construction must be recorded: min ʿibādī — "of My servants". The possessive is to the first person.

I give this as an observation: in this sentence the group that was mocked is presented as a party of the speaker's own servants. The target of the mockery, that is, is named with its owner claiming it.

The prayer — and the weave with the sūra's last verse

And here the most striking weave of the sūra is built.

The speech of the group mocked in the hundred and ninth verse is this:

rabbanā āmannā fa'ghfir lanā wa'rḥamnā wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīn

And the last verse of the sūra (118) is this:

wa qul rabbi'ghfir wa'rḥam wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīn

The last three words are word for word the same. And the verbs too are from the same roots: ighfir and irḥam.

109118
Who says itfarīqun min ʿibādī — the group that is mockedThe Prophet addressed — by command
Moodyaqūlūnaa report (they used to say)wa qula command (say)
Preceded byāmannā — the confession of faithNothing
Sharedfa'ghfir lanā wa'rḥamnā wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīnighfir wa'rḥam wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīn

This can be verified from the wording of the two verses. And I record this as my own reading, its ground being this exact overlap:

The sūra takes the speech that was mocked in the hundred and ninth verse and makes it its own last sentence in the hundred and eighteenth. The prayer that was mocked, that is, becomes the sūra's closing command.

سِخْرِيًّا — the variant reading and the meaning

The root س-خ-ر: to laugh at someone in contempt; and to bend someone to one's service. Both senses come out of the root: sakhira minhu — he mocked him; sakhkharahū — he made him subservient (taskhīr).

A variant reading must be recorded, and the lexicographers connect it with the meaning:

ReadingIts vowelThe meaning according to some lexicographers
sikhriyyankasra on the sīnMockery
sukhriyyanḍamma on the sīnPutting to service, subjugating

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. And some of the lexicographers record that there is no difference of meaning between the two readings, and that both report mockery. I pass both views on.

And the setting of the verse must be recorded: the continuation of the sentence is wa kuntum minhum taḍḥakūn (and you used to laugh at them) — the act of laughing is named openly. This is a datum within the sūra supporting the first sense, and I record it as an observation.

حَتَّىٰٓ أَنسَوْكُمْ ذِكْرِى — the outcome of the mockery

And this sentence is the core of the verse, and it must be recorded.

The word order: ansawkum — the subject of the verb is hum (they), its object kum (you). The party that makes them forget, that is, is the ones being mocked.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this voice, and it carries an oddity: those who are mocked do nothing; but the occupation of mocking keeps the mocker from something. The sentence ascribes that keeping-away to them.

The lexicographers explain this as "ascription to the cause" — that is, what makes one forget is not the ones mocked but being occupied with them. I pass the explanation on as it is transmitted.

And what is forgotten must be recorded: dhikrī — "the remembrance of Me".

And the word is from the same root as dhikrihim in the seventy-first verse:

VerseConstructionWhose
71ʿan dhikrihim muʿriḍūnTheir reminder — what is turned away from
110ḥattā ansawkum dhikrīMy remembrance — what is forgotten

The same root, with two different possessives. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

إِنِّى جَزَيْتُهُمُ ٱلْيَوْمَ بِمَا صَبَرُوٓا۟

And the ground of the recompense must be recorded: bimā ṣabarū — "for their patience".

The root ص-ب-ر: to hold a thing, to confine, to endure. The root was treated in al-ʿAṣr and at al-Balad 90/17.

And what the ṣabr here stands against must be recorded: the verse speaks of no hunger, illness or war — it speaks of patience under mockery.

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the setting of the verse: what calls for the recompense is the situation described in the hundred and tenth verse — being laughed at.

And the same ground was recorded at al-Furqān 25/75: ulāʾika yujzawna'l-ghurfata bimā ṣabarū. The same construction, in two sūras. I rely on that treatment.

PlaceSentenceThe recompense
al-Furqān 25/75yujzawna'l-ghurfata bimā ṣabarūal-Ghurfa — a place
al-Muʾminūn 23/111jazaytuhumu'l-yawma bimā ṣabarūal-Fāʾizūn — a name

The same ground, two different recompenses. And the two sūras' lists of attributes closed in the same way — one with a place, the other with a name. This overlap agrees with the comparison table at the opening of the sūra.

ٱلْفَآئِزُون — root: ف-و-ز

The concrete sense of the root: to escape and reach what is sought; and to perish (the lexicographers record the opposite sense as well). Fawz — gain, deliverance; mafāza — a place of deliverance, and a desert.

The root was treated at al-Ḥashr 59/20 (aṣḥābu'l-jannati humu'l-fāʾizūn), where its distinction from falāḥ was drawn:

Falāḥ… an inner working in this world. Fawz, by contrast… in the verse that reports the outcome. One names the process, the other the arrival.

I rely on that treatment. And in this sūra the distinction is in a testable state, and it was recorded at the hundred and second verse: falāḥ stands at the two ends of the sūra and in the scene of the scales (1, 102, 117); fawz only here (111) — in the verse where the recompense is given.

And the word order must be recorded: annahum humu'l-fāʾizūn — reinforced with the pronoun of separation. Not "they too are among those who have won", that is, but "those who have won are precisely they."


23/112-114

قَٰلَ كَمْ لَبِثْتُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ عَدَدَ سِنِينَ · قَالُوا۟ لَبِثْنَا يَوْمًا أَوْ بَعْضَ يَوْمٍ فَسْـَٔلِ ٱلْعَآدِّينَ · قَٰلَ إِن لَّبِثْتُمْ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا لَّوْ أَنَّكُمْ كُنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ

qāla kam labithtum fi'l-arḍi ʿadada sinīn · qālū labithnā yawman aw baʿḍa yawmin fa's'ali'l-ʿāddīn · qāla in labithtum illā qalīlan law annakum kuntum taʿlamūn

"He said: 'How many years did you stay on the earth?' They said: 'We stayed a day, or part of a day; ask those who count.' He said: 'You stayed only a little — if only you had known.'"

The variant reading

Two readings are transmitted for the verb at the head of the hundred and twelfth and hundred and fourteenth verses:

ReadingPatternWho says it
qālaPerfect — "he said"The third person
qulImperative — "say"A command to the one addressed

Both readings are transmitted; I do not impose a preference. On the second reading the question is put into the Prophet's mouth.

كَمْ لَبِثْتُمْ فِى ٱلْأَرْضِ عَدَدَ سِنِينَ

The root ل-ب-ث: to stay in a place, to tarry. Labth — staying, delay.

And the word order must be recorded: the question is asked with kam (how many) and the measure is given openly: ʿadada sinīn"by the number of years."

I give this as my own reading, its ground being the presence of this qualification: the question itself fixes the unit of measure. And the answer given does not use that unit — it says yawman aw baʿḍa yawm. The question is asked in years, that is, and the answer given in days.

لَبِثْنَا يَوْمًا أَوْ بَعْضَ يَوْمٍ — and the other measures across this series

This expression is a repeated pattern in the Qurʾān and has been treated in several places across this series. A table of comparison:

PlaceExpressionThe measure
al-Aḥqāf 46/35ka-annahum yawma yarawna mā yūʿadūna lam yalbathū illā sāʿatan min nahārAn hour of a day
al-Nāziʿāt 79/46ka-annahum yawma yarawnahā lam yalbathū illā ʿashiyyatan aw ḍuḥāhāAn evening or a forenoon
al-Rūm 30/55yuqsimu'l-mujrimūna mā labithū ghayra sāʿaLess than an hour
al-Muʾminūn 23/113labithnā yawman aw baʿḍa yawmA day or part of one

All four expressions do the same work. And this measure was treated at al-Aḥqāf 46/35, where it was recorded:

The measure is worth recording: sāʿatan min nahār — a portion of the daytime. Not of the night but of the day: that is, of the time a person spends awake and aware.

I rely on that treatment. And the difference of the expression in al-Muʾminūn must be recorded:

One. The measure is larger — al-Aḥqāf and al-Rūm an hour, al-Nāziʿāt an evening, al-Muʾminūn a day.

Two. And it carries an uncertainty: yawman aw baʿḍa yawm — "a day, or part of a day". No definite figure can be given.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the particle aw: the answer says less that it is giving a measure than that it cannot measure.

فَسْـَٔلِ ٱلْعَآدِّين

The root ع-د-د: to count. ʿAdad — a number; ʿādd — one who counts.

And the exegetes differ over whom the sentence means:

ReadingWho al-ʿāddūn are
1The angels — those who record deeds and days
2Those who deal with numbers — a general expression
3No one in particular — a deflection meaning "ask whoever is counting"

I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

And the form of the answer is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading, its ground being that the sentence refers the matter to someone else: the answering party does not trust its own answer. Fa's'ali'l-ʿāddīn — "ask those who count." The answer, that is, is both a guess and a withdrawal.

إِن لَّبِثْتُمْ إِلَّا قَلِيلًا لَّوْ أَنَّكُمْ كُنتُمْ تَعْلَمُونَ

And the response must be recorded: the answer given is not corrected — it is confirmed.

In labithtum illā qalīlā — "you stayed only a little."

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the build of the sentence: the answer does not turn out wrong. What is wrong is that this answer was not given in this world. Indeed the continuation of the sentence says so: law annakum kuntum taʿlamūn — "if only you had known."

And the apodosis of the particle law has been elided — the lexicographers record this and supply it as something like "…you would not have acted so." The sentence is left unfinished.

This is an observation about the word order: the elision leaves the completing of the sentence to the reader.


23/115

أَفَحَسِبْتُمْ أَنَّمَا خَلَقْنَٰكُمْ عَبَثًا وَأَنَّكُمْ إِلَيْنَا لَا تُرْجَعُونَ

a-fa-ḥasibtum annamā khalaqnākum ʿabathan wa annakum ilaynā lā turjaʿūn

"Did you suppose that We created you in vain, and that you would not be returned to Us?"

عَبَثًا — root: ع-ب-ث

The concrete sense of the root is given by the lexicographers as follows: to meddle with a thing aimlessly, to keep fiddling with it by hand. ʿAbitha bi-shayʾ — he played idly with a thing, he fiddled with it. And from this ʿabath — a work attached to no purpose.

The root is worked out here for the first time in this series. The word occurs in two places in the Qurʾān: al-Shuʿarāʾ 26/128 (a-tabnūna bi-kulli rīʿin āyatan taʿbathūn) and this verse.

عَبَث and لَعِب — the distinction

And this verse must be compared with another word treated across this series.

It was treated in detail at al-Dukhān 44/38 (wa mā khalaqnā'l-samāwāti wa'l-arḍa wa mā baynahumā lāʿibīn). What was recorded there:

The sentence does not say "We did not create." Mā khalaqnā … lāʿibīn — what is negated is not the act but the state of the act.

And in al-Dukhān it was given as an entry about the wording that the same sentence occurs at al-Anbiyāʾ 21/16 as well; that verse was treated at al-Anbiyāʾ 21/16-18. I rely on both.

The two words can be compared, and the lexicographers record a difference between them:

WordRootThe difference the lexicographers give
لَعِبل-ع-بPlay — it has a purpose (pleasure, amusement), but it is not serious
عَبَثع-ب-ثIdle doingit has no purpose at all

I pass this distinction on as it is transmitted.

And three verses can be set side by side:

PlaceThe state negatedThe objectAbout whom
al-Dukhān 44/38lāʿibīn — as those playingThe heavens and the earthThe Creatormā khalaqnā
al-Anbiyāʾ 21/16lāʿibīnSky, earth and what is betweenThe Creator
al-Muʾminūn 23/115ʿabathan — in vainYou — the human beingThe addressee's suppositiona-fa-ḥasibtum

I record the difference among the three verses as my own reading, its ground being the table above:

One. A difference of object. al-Dukhān and al-Anbiyāʾ name the universe; al-Muʾminūn names the addressee directlykhalaqnākum.

Two. A difference of mood. The others are statements (We did not create); al-Muʾminūn is a question (did you suppose).

Three. A difference of word. In the others laʿib (play), here ʿabath (idle doing). And by the distinction the lexicographers record, ʿabath is the heavier: in play there is an aim, in ʿabath there is none at all.

Four — and this is worth recording: al-Dukhān and al-Anbiyāʾ negate a state of the Creator; al-Muʾminūn asks about the condition of what is created. Khalaqnākum ʿabathan — "you, in vain". The question, that is, is about the meaning of the human being's own existence.

أَفَحَسِبْتُمْ — the return to the fifty-fifth verse

The root ح-س-ب occurs three times in the sūra, and this can be verified from the text:

VerseSentenceWhat is supposed
55a-yaḥsabūna annamā numidduhum bihī min mālin wa banīn…That what is given is a favour
115a-fa-ḥasibtum annamā khalaqnākum ʿabathāThat the creation is in vain
117fa-innamā ḥisābuhū ʿinda rabbihThe reckoning — the root in its noun form

And the two questions are built on the same pattern: annamā + a verb. The sūra, that is, questions two great suppositions in the same language: one about what is given within life, the other about life itself.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this shared pattern.

وَأَنَّكُمْ إِلَيْنَا لَا تُرْجَعُونَ — the return to the ninety-ninth verse

The root ر-ج-ع occurred in the ninety-ninth verse: rabbi'rjiʿūn — "send me back."

VerseSentenceWho asks / what is said
99rabbi'rjiʿūnThey ask to return to the world
115ilaynā lā turjaʿūnThey suppose they will not be returned to Us
60annahum ilā rabbihim rājiʿūnWhat the believers know — that they are returning to their Lord

All three occurrences can be verified from the text. And I record this as my own reading, its ground being this threefold distribution:

In the sixtieth verse the return is a piece of knowledge that makes hearts tremble. In the hundred and fifteenth the denial of that same return is put as a supposition. And in the ninety-ninth the return is what is at last asked for and not given.

The same root, that is, in three different conditions in the sūra: known, denied, requested.

And the word order must be recorded: ilaynā has been brought forward (taqdīm) — "to Us — that you would not be returned". The emphasis is on to whom the return is.


23/116

فَتَعَٰلَى ٱللَّهُ ٱلْمَلِكُ ٱلْحَقُّ لَآ إِلَٰهَ إِلَّا هُوَ رَبُّ ٱلْعَرْشِ ٱلْكَرِيمِ

fa-taʿāla'llāhu'l-maliku'l-ḥaqq, lā ilāha illā hū, rabbu'l-ʿarshi'l-karīm

"Exalted is God, the true Sovereign. There is no god but He, the Lord of the noble throne."

فَتَعَٰلَى — the root's last occurrence

The root ع-ل-و was treated at the forty-sixth verse, and its three occurrences were tabulated there (46, 91, 116). This is the third and the last of them.

VerseWordWho
46qawman ʿālīnPharaoh's company — human beings
91la-ʿalā baʿḍuhum ʿalā baʿḍThe supposed gods
116fa-taʿāla'llāhGod

And the word order must be recorded: the sentence begins with fa — that is, as the consequence drawn from the preceding verse.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this particle: the hundred and fifteenth verse had asked whether the creation was in vain. The hundred and sixteenth gives the answer with a name: al-Maliku'l-Ḥaqq"the true Sovereign."

ٱلْمَلِكُ ٱلْحَقّ

The root م-ل-ك was treated at the eighty-eighth verse (malakūt).

The root ح-ق-ق: a thing's being fixed and in its place. Ḥaqq — what is fixed, what is real; and a right, a due.

And the construction must be recorded: al-Maliku'l-Ḥaqq — an adjective, "the true Sovereign".

I give this as an observation: the adjective reports not that the sovereignty exists but that it is true. And several claims of false sovereignty were named across the sūra — Pharaoh's company (46), the supposed gods (91), those who made others serve them (47).

And the word al-Ḥaqq occurred several times in the sūra: 41 (bi'l-ḥaqq), 62 (bi'l-ḥaqq), 70 (bi'l-ḥaqq and li'l-ḥaqq), 71 (al-ḥaqq), 90 (bi'l-ḥaqq), 116 (al-Ḥaqq). And in the hundred and sixteenth verse the word comes for the first time as an attribute of a name. This is a distribution that can be verified from the text.

رَبُّ ٱلْعَرْشِ ٱلْكَرِيم — the return to the eighty-sixth verse

The root ع-ر-ش: to raise, to roof a thing over. ʿArsh — a throne, a raised canopy; ʿarīsh — a trellis for vines.

And the construction had occurred in the eighty-sixth verse with a different adjective:

VerseConstructionAdjective
86wa rabbu'l-ʿarshi'l-ʿaẓīmʿAẓīm — mighty
116rabbu'l-ʿarshi'l-karīmKarīm — noble, precious

Two adjectives, in the same construction, thirty verses apart. This is a repetition that can be verified within the sūra.

The root ك-ر-م: to be precious, to be generous. The root was treated at al-ʿAlaq 96/3 (wa rabbuka'l-akram) and at al-Dukhān 44/49.

And the difference between the two adjectives is worth recording, and I give this as my own reading: ʿaẓīm looks to measure — magnitude. Karīm looks to worth — nobility.

And the settings of the two verses fit this difference: the eighty-sixth verse was a question (who is the Lord of these) — there magnitude is named. The hundred and sixteenth is a conclusion — there worth is named.

This is a reading, and it is not binding.


23/117

وَمَن يَدْعُ مَعَ ٱللَّهِ إِلَٰهًا ءَاخَرَ لَا بُرْهَٰنَ لَهُۥ بِهِۦ فَإِنَّمَا حِسَابُهُۥ عِندَ رَبِّهِۦٓ إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُفْلِحُ ٱلْكَٰفِرُونَ

wa man yadʿu maʿa'llāhi ilāhan ākhara lā burhāna lahū bihī fa-innamā ḥisābuhū ʿinda rabbih, innahū lā yufliḥu'l-kāfirūn

"Whoever calls upon another god along with God, for which he has no proof whatever — his reckoning is with his Lord alone. The disbelievers do not attain deliverance."

لَا بُرْهَٰنَ لَهُۥ بِهِۦ — the kind of adjective

بُرْهَٰنa decisive, irresistible proof. The lexicographers differ over the origin of the word: it is said to derive from the root ب-ر-ه (whiteness, clarity); the view that it is a word taken into Arabic is also transmitted. I pass the disagreement on; I do not impose a preference.

The word occurs in several places in the Qurʾān: al-Baqara 2/111, al-Nisāʾ 4/174, al-Qaṣaṣ 28/32 and 28/75, al-Naml 27/64.

And the parsing of the sentence must be recorded: lā burhāna lahū bihī is an adjective to ilāhan ākhar. The lexicographers count this adjective a ṣifa kāshifa — that is, an adjective brought not to distinguish but to disclose the state of the case.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this parsing: the sentence does not distinguish between "a god for which there is no proof" and "a god for which there is a proof". The adjective is set down to show that there is no such distinction. And the matter had already been settled in the ninety-first verse of the sūra: wa mā kāna maʿahū min ilāh.

فَإِنَّمَا حِسَابُهُۥ عِندَ رَبِّهِ

The root ح-س-ب was treated at the hundred and fifteenth verse, and its three occurrences in the sūra were tabulated there (55, 115, 117). This is the third, and it is the root's noun form.

I record this as an observation: the sūra had twice asked "did you suppose?" (a-yaḥsabūna, a-fa-ḥasibtum); here the same root turns into a word of outcome: ḥisāb. Supposing and reckoning, that is, come from the same root.

This is a datum of the language, and the lexicographers record under the root the core "to count, to reckon"ḥasiba (he counted) and ḥasiba (he supposed) are two branches of the same root. I build no forced link between them; I only record the distribution within the sūra.

And innamā must be recorded: a particle of restriction — "only, none but". The place of the reckoning is being limited.

This is a link in the limit of responsibility tabulated at al-Furqān 25/43 and al-Qaṣaṣ 28/56: the party that judges is separated from the party that delivers the message. And the same limit was drawn in this sūra at the fifty-fourth verse (fa-dharhum fī ghamratihim).

إِنَّهُۥ لَا يُفْلِحُ ٱلْكَٰفِرُونَ — the return to the sūra's first verse

And here the clearest frame of the sūra closes.

VerseSentenceMoodSubject
1qad aflaḥa'l-muʾminūnPerfect — affirmativeThe believers
117innahū lā yufliḥu'l-kāfirūnImperfect — negativeThe disbelievers

The sūra opens with the positive of a single root and closes with its negative. This is a fact that can be verified from the text.

And four differences must be recorded:

One. Mood. The first is perfect (done and finished), the second imperfect (ongoing). The deliverance is complete, that is, and the failure to attain it continues.

Two. Subject. Muʾminūn and kāfirūn — both active participles, both plural, both definite (with the article).

Three. Place. The first is the sūra's first sentence, the second its last verdict (118 is a prayer).

Four. And there is a third occurrence in between: the hundred and second verse (humu'l-mufliḥūn) — the place where the measure is set.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this threefold distribution: the sūra gives the verdict at the start, sets the measure in the middle, and states the negative at the end. And the root sense worked out in al-Baqara fits this frame: falāḥ is to break through an obstacle and come out. The list at the sūra's opening describes how that breaking through is to happen. This is a reading, and it is not binding.


23/118

وَقُل رَّبِّ ٱغْفِرْ وَٱرْحَمْ وَأَنتَ خَيْرُ ٱلرَّٰحِمِينَ

wa qul rabbi'ghfir wa'rḥam wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīn

"Say: 'My Lord, forgive and have mercy; and You are the best of those who show mercy.'"

Two imperatives without an object

The word order must be recorded, and this is the most striking place in the verse: both verbs come without an objectighfir and irḥam. It does not say "forgive me" or "have mercy on us".

And in the hundred and ninth verse the same prayer had objects: fa'ghfir lanā wa'rḥam.

VerseThe verbsObject
109ighfir lanā wa'rḥamnālanā / -nā — "us"
118ighfir wa'rḥamNone

This is a difference that can be verified from the wording of the two verses.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being this elision: in Arabic the dropping of the object reports generality; the lexicographers record this consistently. The prayer, that is, is not closed off to one person or one group.

And the verse-ending must be recorded: the dropping of the objects also fits the sound scheme of the sūra — throughout the sūra the verse endings close with -ūn / -īn, and this verse closes so as well.

I pass both grounds on; they do not exclude one another.

وَأَنتَ خَيْرُ ٱلرَّٰحِمِين — the fifth superlative construction

It is the last of the five superlative constructions in the sūra (14, 29, 72, 109, 118). And the table of the five:

VerseConstructionWho says itSetting
14aḥsanu'l-khāliqīnThe textThe forming
29khayru'l-munzilīnNoah — inside a prayerThe voyage
72khayru'l-rāziqīnThe textThe question of payment
109khayru'l-rāḥimīnThe group that is mocked — inside a prayerThe scene of mockery
118khayru'l-rāḥimīnThe one addressed — by commandThe closing

All five of the five constructions are built on the agent of a verb: creating, sending down, providing, showing mercy (twice).

And three of them occur inside a prayer (29, 109, 118). This is a distribution that can be verified from the text.

The closing of the sūra

And a structural entry: the sūra had opened with a verdict (qad aflaḥa'l-muʾminūn) and closes with a request.

The same structure was recorded in al-Baqara: "the sūra, after 286 verses of legal ruling, history and dispute, ends with a request." And at al-Furqān 25/77 too the sūra closed with the word duʿāʾ. I rely on that treatment.

I record this as my own reading, its ground being the shared closing of the three sūras: all three, after ruling, history and dispute, are attached to a request. And in al-Muʾminūn that request is the very speech that was made an object of mockery within the sūra itself.


The sūra as a whole — looking back

The backbone of the sūra

The sūra opens with a verdict and closes with the negative of that same verdict, and in between it does four separate things:

WorkWhereHow
Description1-11A list of attributes — who it is that attains deliverance
Proof12-22, 78-92The forming, water, plant, animal; the organs, three questions
Example23-50The sequence of messengers — the repetition of the objection
Outcome93-118Death, the barzakh, the trumpet, the scales, the reckoning

And all four are attached to one another: the attributes enumerated in the first list are attached to a set of scales in the hundred and second verse; the objections in the sequence of messengers to the addressee's own sentence in the eighty-second; the organs in the section of proofs to the drawing back in the sixty-sixth.

The weave of words and roots

Word / rootWhereWhat it does
ف-ل-ح1 — aflaḥa · 102 — al-mufliḥūn · 117 — lā yufliḥuThe frame of the sūra — verdict, measure, negative
ن-ش-أ14, 19, 31, 42, 78Five occurrences — the human being, the garden, a generation, generations, the organs
basharun mithlukum24, 33, 47Three peoples, one objection
rabbi'nṣurnī bimā kadhdhabūn26, 39Word for word the same prayer
bihī jinna25, 70Noah and the Prophet addressed
ḥattā ḥīn25, 54The same span in two mouths
ābāʾ + al-awwalīn24, 68A ground / a question
غ-م-ر54, 63They / their hearts
ت-ر-ف33, 64The giving / the taking
س-ر-ع56, 61Delusion / attributefi'l-khayrāt
ح-س-ب55, 115, 117Two suppositions, one reckoning
āyātī tutlā ʿalaykum66, 105This world / the hereafter
أعرض3, 71Attribute / fault — according to its object
ع-ل-و46, 91, 116Human beings, supposed gods, God
خ-س-ر34, 103The word of the objection, the verdict of the sūra
rabbu'l-ʿarsh86 (al-ʿaẓīm), 116 (al-karīm)Two attributes
khayru / aḥsanu …14, 29, 72, 109, 118Five superlative constructions
wa anta khayru'l-rāḥimīn109, 118The mocked prayer, the closing command
ر-ج-ع60, 99, 115The return: known, requested, denied
ق-ر-ر13 (qarārin makīn), 50 (dhāti qarārin)Two places of shelter
ḥattā idhā64, 77, 99Three turning points

The two lists of attributes — a summary

23/1-1123/57-61
ItemsSixFour
KindActs — prayer, speech, property, body, covenantStates — trembling, faith, tawḥīd, a trembling heart
FrameIt opens with the prayer and closes with the prayerThe word rabb is in all four items
Closingal-Firdawsa placeyusāriʿūn / sābiqūna movement

And these two lists were compared in detail at the beginning of this file with the ʿibādu'l-raḥmān list at al-Furqān 25/63-77. I do not repeat the table there; its summary is this: four shared fields (prayer, idle speech, property, chastity), one item peculiar to al-Muʾminūn (trust and covenant), seven items peculiar to al-Furqān, and both lists ending with a dwelling.

Disagreements on which no preference is adopted in this commentary

I record this per the method (Method): in the places below two or more readings were transmitted, and in none of them was a preference imposed.

VerseThe disagreement
4The scope of the word zakāt — institutional zakāt, or the act of purification
5-6The change of particle between li-furūjihim and illā ʿalā azwājihim
8li-amānātihim / li-amānatihim; and ʿahd coming in the singular
11The origin of the word firdaws
14The parsing of khalqan ākhar; what "another creation" is; the construction aḥsanu'l-khāliqīn
17What ṭarāʾiq is — the seven heavens, layers, paths
20tanbutu / tunbitu; the work of the bāʾ; saynāʾ / sīnāʾ; the name of the tree
27What the tannūr is; min kullin / min kulli
29munzalan / manzilan
31Who the people are — ʿĀd, Thamūd, indefinite
44tatrā / tatran
45The relation between āyāt and sulṭān
49The referent of the pronoun in laʿallahum yahtadūn
50āyatan coming in the singular; the root of maʿīn; the vowelling of rabwa; where the place is
51Whom the address yā ayyuha'l-rusul is directed to
52wa inna / wa anna / wa in
53What zubur is — books, pieces, groups; zuburan / zubara; its parsing
55-56Whether annamā is joined or separate
60yuʾtūna mā ātaw / yaʾtūna mā ataw; the parsing of annahum
61The work of lahā
63The referent of the pronoun hādhā; the sense of min dūni dhālika
67The referent of the pronoun bihī; tahjurūn / tuhjirūn
71What al-Ḥaqq is — God, the revelation, the real, the order; the sense of dhikruhum
72kharjan fa-kharāju / kharājan fa-kharāju / kharjan fa-kharju
76The root of the verb istakānaس-ك-ن or ك-و-ن
77The origin of the name Iblīs
85, 87, 89sa-yaqūlūna li'llāh / sa-yaqūlūna Allāh
92The parsing of ʿālimi — genitive or nominative
99irjiʿūn coming in the plural
100The sense of innahā kalimatun huwa qāʾiluhā; the scope of fīmā taraktu; the direction of min warāʾihim
101The relation between lā yatasāʾalūn and yatasāʾalūn at al-Ṣāffāt 37/27
106shiqwatunā / shaqāwatunā
110sikhriyyan / sukhriyyan
112, 114qāla / qul; who al-ʿāddūn are
117The origin of the word burhān

The methodological limits drawn in this file

I record them plainly:

  • In verses 12-16 the staged forming was not equated with the terms of modern embryology. The limit drawn at Ghāfir (al-Muʾmin) 40/67, al-Zumar 39/6, al-Sajda 32/7-9 and in al-ʿAlaq was kept unchanged and its grounds were not repeated.
  • No matching with any modern classification was made on the basis of sabʿa ṭarāʾiq in verse 17. The entry made in al-Ṭāriq for astronomical claims was counted valid here too.
  • No claim of "foretelling" about the hydrological cycle or underground water was built on fa-askannāhu fi'l-arḍ in verse 18. The entry at al-Mursalāt 77/20-23 was kept.
  • For the barzakh in verse 100, no description whatever beyond the wording of the verse was made. On the state of the grave, the condition of souls and the like, no report was transmitted and no speculation was entered into.
  • The place of the tannūr in verse 27, the place of the rabwa in verse 50, the name of the people in verse 31 — in all three no detail the Qurʾān does not give was added; the place names and people's names that are transmitted were not passed on, since I am not certain of their sources.
  • For the construction mā malakat aymānuhum in verses 5-7 no legal ruling was issued; only two entries from the text were made.
  • No ruling was issued in verse 4 about the threshold, the rate and the categories of zakāt.
  • No theological dispute about destiny was opened on the basis of ghalabat ʿalaynā shiqwatunā in verse 106.
  • The comparisons made with al-Anbiyāʾ in verses 52, 71 and 115 were rested on al-Anbiyāʾ; the analyses made in that file were not repeated.

Points in this file of which I could not be certain

I record them plainly:

  • What "another creation" in verse 14 is. The verse gives no name; four explanations were tabulated and none can be proved from the text.
  • The identity of the people in verse 31. Three views were given; since the sūra gives no name, no preference was adopted.
  • The sense of the word zubur in verse 53. The variant reading is directly bound up with the disagreement; the reading made by way of the core sense of the root is mine and is not binding.
  • The relation between lā yatasāʾalūn in verse 101 and yatasāʾalūn in al-Ṣāffāt. Three explanations were given; the datum within the sūra (the scene of speech at 112-113) supports the first explanation but does not prove it.
  • The root of the verb istakāna in verse 76. Since the disagreement is unresolved, no conclusion was drawn from the repetition of the root س-ك-ن within the sūra.

My own inferences

The following sections are my reading, not transmitted material, and they are not binding:

  • That the first list opens with the prayer and closes with the prayer, and that the four items between are to be read as speech, property, body, relationship.
  • The interpretation of the four differences between 23/2 and 23/9 (singular-plural, -ʿalā, noun-verb, Form I-Form III) as a distinction between a single prayer and a lifetime of prayer.
  • The six observations drawn from the comparison table of the two lists of attributes.
  • The separation of the al-Muʾminūn list from the al-Furqān list as one a description, the other an answer.
  • The reading of the three occurrences of thumma in verses 12-14 as three thresholds; the finding that the verb kasawnā reports covering, not transformation; and the reading concerning the fact that the threshold set by anshaʾnā is left unnamed.
  • The meaning of the change of pronoun (iltifāt) in verse 15.
  • The conclusion drawn from the stopping / making-travel contrast between askannā here and salaka in al-Zumar at verse 18.
  • The reading of block II as a whole built on the passive voice of tuḥmalūn in verse 22.
  • The reading of the command kulū in verse 51 as the answer to the objection in verse 33; and its comparison with the method of al-Furqān.
  • The bringing forward of the permanence side of zubur in verse 53.
  • The interpretation of the yusāriʿūna fi'l-khayrāt weave between verses 56 and 61 as delusion / attribute.
  • The reading of the limit of burden in verse 62 as the measure of the race in verse 61.
  • Counting the plural form of ahwāʾ in verse 71 decisive for the working of the proof.
  • The reading concerning verse 78 being placed immediately after the cutting off of hope in verse 77.
  • The interpretation built on the passive voice of tusḥarūn in verse 89.
  • The difference from Fuṣṣilat 41/34 in verse 96: the absence of any promise of an outcome.
  • The separation of barzakh in verse 100 from its use in al-Furqān by a difference of particle (bayna / ilā).
  • The separation of the request in verses 99-100 from those in Fāṭir and al-Sajda in four respects.
  • The reading of the weave between verses 109 and 118 as "the mocked prayer, the closing command".
  • The interpretation of the difference between ʿabath and laʿib in verse 115 together with the differences of object and mood.
  • The measure / worth distinction between ʿaẓīm and karīm in verse 116.
  • The reading of the threefold distribution of falāḥ in verse 117 as verdict, measure, negative.
  • The whole of the sections "The structure of the sūra", "Repetitions within the sūra" and "The sūra as a whole".

69 sections

  1. al-Muʾminūn 23:1
  2. al-Muʾminūn 23:2
  3. al-Muʾminūn 23:3
  4. al-Muʾminūn 23:4
  5. al-Muʾminūn 23:5-7
  6. al-Muʾminūn 23:8
  7. al-Muʾminūn 23:9
  8. al-Muʾminūn 23:10-11
  9. al-Muʾminūn 23:12
  10. al-Muʾminūn 23:13
  11. al-Muʾminūn 23:14
  12. al-Muʾminūn 23:15-16
  13. al-Muʾminūn 23:17
  14. al-Muʾminūn 23:18
  15. al-Muʾminūn 23:19
  16. al-Muʾminūn 23:20
  17. al-Muʾminūn 23:21-22
  18. al-Muʾminūn 23:23
  19. al-Muʾminūn 23:24-25
  20. al-Muʾminūn 23:26
  21. al-Muʾminūn 23:27
  22. al-Muʾminūn 23:28-29
  23. al-Muʾminūn 23:30
  24. al-Muʾminūn 23:31-32
  25. al-Muʾminūn 23:33-34
  26. al-Muʾminūn 23:35-38
  27. al-Muʾminūn 23:39-41
  28. al-Muʾminūn 23:42-44
  29. al-Muʾminūn 23:45-46
  30. al-Muʾminūn 23:47-49
  31. al-Muʾminūn 23:50
  32. al-Muʾminūn 23:51
  33. al-Muʾminūn 23:52
  34. al-Muʾminūn 23:53
  35. al-Muʾminūn 23:54
  36. al-Muʾminūn 23:55-56
  37. al-Muʾminūn 23:57-59
  38. al-Muʾminūn 23:60
  39. al-Muʾminūn 23:61
  40. al-Muʾminūn 23:62
  41. al-Muʾminūn 23:63
  42. al-Muʾminūn 23:64-65
  43. al-Muʾminūn 23:66-67
  44. al-Muʾminūn 23:68-70
  45. al-Muʾminūn 23:71
  46. al-Muʾminūn 23:72
  47. al-Muʾminūn 23:73-74
  48. al-Muʾminūn 23:75-76
  49. al-Muʾminūn 23:77
  50. al-Muʾminūn 23:78
  51. al-Muʾminūn 23:79-80
  52. al-Muʾminūn 23:81-83
  53. al-Muʾminūn 23:84-89 — Three questions, three answers
  54. al-Muʾminūn 23:90-92
  55. al-Muʾminūn 23:93-95
  56. al-Muʾminūn 23:96
  57. al-Muʾminūn 23:97-98
  58. al-Muʾminūn 23:99-100
  59. al-Muʾminūn 23:101
  60. al-Muʾminūn 23:102-103
  61. al-Muʾminūn 23:104-105
  62. al-Muʾminūn 23:106-107
  63. al-Muʾminūn 23:108
  64. al-Muʾminūn 23:109-111
  65. al-Muʾminūn 23:112-114
  66. al-Muʾminūn 23:115
  67. al-Muʾminūn 23:116
  68. al-Muʾminūn 23:117
  69. al-Muʾminūn 23:118